BPL Jambusar EIA Report

Frepored bv :
October, 2010
$ponsor :
ENVIkONMENIAL IMFACI A$$E$$MENI
AND kI$K A$$E$$MENI
FOk
FkOFO$ED 7200 MW GA$ 8A$ED FOWEk FkOJECI AI
KHANFbk-DEH VILLAGE, JAM8b$Ak IALbKA,
8HAkbCH DI$IkICI, GbJAkAI
M/s. 8horuch Fower L|m|ted
(A who||y owned subs|d|ory of M/s. ke||once Fofo|ogongo Fower L|m|fed)
An|| Dh|rubho| Ambon| Group (ADAG)
Mumbo|
V|mto Lobs Ltd.
142 IDA, Fhose-II, Cher|opo||v
Hvderobod-500 051
envv|mto.com, www.v|mto.com
(NA8FI & QCl Accred|fed, NA8L Accred|fed & l5O 17025 Cerf|f|ed Loborofory,
kecogn|zed by MoFF, New De|h|)
kEFOkI FOk Fb8LIC HEAkING

Fc( cnc cn Lehc|f cf VlMI/ LcL: LimiIec

/pp(cvec Ly : M. Jonordhon

Sicnec :

Fc:iIicn : V|ce Fres|dent (Env)

DcIe : CcIcLe( 27. 2010

The report has been prepared inline with the prescribed TORs issued vide
letter No. J-13012/104/2010-IA.II (T) dated October 12, 2010 of Ministry
of Environment and Forests, New Delhi.

This report has been prepared by Vimta Labs Limited with all reasonable
skill, care and diligence within the terms of the contract with the client,
incorporating our General Terms and Conditions of Business and taking
account of the resources devoted to it by agreement with the client.

kEFOkI FOk Fb8LIC HEAkING
ENVIkONMENIAL IMFACI A$$E$$MENI
FOk
FkOFO$ED 7200 MW GA$ 8A$ED FOWEk FkOJECI
AI KHANFbk-DEH VILLAGE, JAM8b$Ak IALbKA,
8HAkbCH DI$IkICI, GbJAkAI

M/s. 8horuch Fower L|m|ted
(A who||y owned subs|d|ory of M/s. ke||once Fofo|ogongo Fower L|m|fed)
An|| Dh|rubho| Ambon| Group (ADAG)
Mumbo|

Environmental Impact Assessment and Risk Assessment for the
Proposed 7200 MW Gas Based Power Project at Khanpur-Deh village,
Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat
8 8h ho or ru uc ch h
F Fo ow we er r L L| |m m| |f fe ed d
Table of Contents

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad TC-1
Table of Contents
_______________________________________________________________
Chapter # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________
Table of Contents TC-1
List of Figures TC-4
List of Tables TC-5

1.0 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the Report C1-1
1.2 Identification of the Project & Project Proponent C1-1
1.3 Brief Description of the Project C1-2
1.4 Scope of the Study C1-7

2.0 Project Description

2.1 Type of Project C2-1
2.2 Need of the Project C2-1
2.3 Location of the Project C2-1
2.4 Plant Size and Operational Details C2-3
2.5 Proposed Schedule and Approval for Implementation C2-5
2.6 Technology Details C2-5
2.7 Process Description C2-6
2.8 Resources and Utilities Requirement C2-13

3.0 Description of the Environment

3.1 Introduction C3-1
3.2 Profile of Bharuch C3-1
3.3 Geology and Hydrogeology C3-2
3.4 Landuse Studies & Satellite Imagery C3-2
3.5 Climatology and Meteorology C3-8
3.6 Ambient Air Quality C3-19
3.7 Water Quality C3-23
3.8 Soil Characteristics C3-32
3.9 Noise Level Survey C3-37
3.10 Flora and Fauna Studies C3-41
3.11 Demography and Socio-economics C3-53

4.0 Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase C4-1
4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase C4-4
4.4 Mitigation Measures C4-17

5.0 Analysis of Alternative Technology and Site

5.1 Analysis of Alternative Technology C5-1
5.2 Selection of Technology C5-1
Table of Contents

Table of Contents (contd.)
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

5.3 Analysis of Alternative Site C5-2

6.0 Environment Monitoring Program

6.2 Monitoring and Reporting Schedule C6-1
6.3 Infrastructure from Environmental Protection C6-3

7.0 Additional Studies

7.1 Risk Assessment C7-1
7.2 Approach to Risk Assessment Study C7-1
7.3 Hazard Identification C7-2
7.4 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation C7-3
7.5 Risk Analysis due to Chlorine Handling C7-15
7.6 Disaster Management Plan C7-20
7.7 Off-Site Emergency Preparedness C7-30
7.8 Occupational Health and Safety C7-34

8.0 Project Benefits

8.1 Availability of Quality Power C8-1
8.2 Improvement in the Physical Infrastructure C8-1
8.3 Improvement in the Social Infrastructure C8-1
8.4 Employment Potential C8-2
8.5 Corporate Social Responsibility C8-3

9.0 Administrative Aspects

9.2 Formation of an Environmental Management System C9-1
9.3 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures C9-6
9.4 Institutional Arrangement for Pollution Control C9-6
9.5 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures C9-6

10.0 Summary and Conclusions

10.1 Justification for Implementation of the Project C10-1
10.2 Summary of the EIA Report C10-1
10.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation
Measures C10-5
10.4 Environmental Monitoring Programme C10-7
10.5 Conclusions C10-7

Table of Contents

Table of Contents (contd.)
_______________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________

11.0 Disclosure of Consultants

11.1 About Vimta Labs Limited Introduction C11-1

Annexures

Annexure-I Copy of Terms of Reference issued by MoEF
Annexure-II Govt. of Gujarat Consent Letter
Annexure-III Methodology for Sampling and Analysis
Annexure-IV Landuse Pattern
Annexure-V Ambient Air Quality Levels
Annexure-VI Demographic Details
Annexure-VII Emission Calculations

Table of Contents

List of Figures
_______________________________________________________________
Figures # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________

1.1 Index Map of the Proposed Power Plant C1-4
1.2 Study Area Map C1-5
1.3 Site Photographs C1-6
2.1 Plant Layout Plan C2-4
2.2 Process Flow Diagram C2-7
2.3a Single Shaft CCPP C2-8
2.3b Multi Shaft CCPP C2-9
2.4 Water Balance Diagram C1-15
2.5 Gas Supply Pipeline Route C2-18
3.4.1 Thematic Map of Study Area C3-6
3.4.2 Landuse Pattern based on Satellite Data C3-7
3.5.1 Seasonal Windroses Pre-Monsoon IMD, Surat C3-13
3.5.2 Seasonal Windroses Monsoon IMD, Surat C3-14
3.5.3 Seasonal Windroses Post-Monsoon IMD, Surat C3-15
3.5.4 Seasonal Windroses Winter IMD, Surat C3-16
3.5.5 Annual Windrose IMD, Surat C3-17
3.5.6 Site Specific Wind Rose - Study Period C3-18
3.6.1 Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations C3-20
3.7.1 Water Sampling Locations C3-26
3.8.1 Soil Sampling Locations C3-34
3.9.1 Noise Level Monitoring Locations C3-38
3.10.1 Ecological Locations C3-43
4.1 Short Term 24 Hourly Incremental GLCs of NOx C4-9
4.2 Water Balance Diagram C4-11
4.3 Predicted Noise Levels C4-15
4.4 Scheme for Proposed Wastewater Treatment C4-23
4.5 Scheme for Proposed Sewage Treatment C4-24
4.6 Typical Rainwater Harvesting Structure C4-26
4.7 Greenbelt Development Plan C4-31
7.1 Damage Contour for One HSD Tank on Fire C6-13
7.2 Damage Contour for Fifteen HSD Tanks on Fire C6-14
7.3 Onsite Emergency Organization Chart C7-28

Table of Contents

List of Tables
_______________________________________________________________
Tables # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________

1.1 Region Wise Energy Supply Position C1-7
1.2 Compliance to Terms of Reference C1-8
2.1 Environmental Setting of the Site C2-1
2.2 Salient Features of Proposed Units C2-5
2.3 Configuration of Proposed Units C2-6
2.4 Landuse Breakup at the Project Site C2-13
2.5 Estimated Consumptive Water Requirement C2-14
2.6 Typical Natural Gas Composition C2-14
2.7 Indicative R-LNG Specification C2-16
2.8 Typical Data Sheet for HSD C2-16
3.4.1 Landuse Pattern in 10 km Study Area C3-3
3.4.2 Landuse/Land Cover Classification System C3-4
3.4.3 Landuse Breakup based on IRS P6 Data C3-8
3.5.1 Meteorological Parameters and Monitoring Frequency C3-9
3.5.2 Climatological Data-IMD Surat C3-10
3.5.3 Summary of Wind Pattern, IMD Surat C3-11
3.5.4 Summary of Meteorological Data recorded at Site C3-11
3.6.1 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring C3-19
3.6.2 Monitored Parameters and Frequency of Sampling C3-21
3.6.3 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results C3-22
3.7.1 Details of Water Sampling Locations C3-24
3.7.2a Surface Water Quality C3-27
3.7.2b Ground Water Quality C3-27
3.8.1 Details of Soil Sampling Locations C3-33
3.8.2 Soil Analysis Results C3-35
3.8.3 Standard Soil Classification C3-36
3.9.1 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations C3-37
3.9.2 Ambient Noise Levels C3-40
3.10.1 Details of Terrestrial Ecological Sampling Locations C3-41
3.10.2 Details of Aquatic Ecological Sampling Locations C3-42
3.10.3 List of Flora Found in the Study Area C3-45
3.10.4 List of Animals Recorded in the Study Area C3-49
3.10.5 List of Marine Fish Species found the Study Area C3-50
3.10.6 Details of Diversity Indices in Study Area C3-52
3.10.7 List of Phytoplankton Species Identified from Study Area C3-53
3.10.8 List of Zooplankton Species Identified from Study Area C3-53
3.11.1 Distribution of the Population in the Study Area C3-54
3.11.2 Distribution of the Population by Social Structure C3-55
3.11.3 Distribution of Literate and Literacy Rates C3-56
3.11.4 Occupational Structure C3-56
3.11.5 Educational Facilities in the Study Area C3-57
3.11.6 Health Facilities in the Study Area C3-58
4.1 Stack Emission Details Considered for Modeling C4-7
4.2 Predicted 24 hourly Short-term Incremental Concentrations C4-8
4.3 Resultant Baseline Concentrations C4-8
4.4 Water Requirement and Wastewater Generation C4-12
Table of Contents

List of Tables (contd..)
_______________________________________________________________
Tables # Title Page #
_______________________________________________________________

4.5 Anticipated Adverse Environmental Impacts and Mitigation C4-16
4.6 Waste Management at Proposed CCPP C4-22
4.7 Greenbelt Development Schedule C4-28
4.8 List of Species Planted within Plant Complex C4-29
5.1 Alternative Sites Evaluation C5-6
6.1 Monitoring Schedule for Environmental Parameters C6-2
7.1 Category-Wise Schedule of Storage Tanks C7-3
7.2 Properties of Fuels/Chemicals Used at the Plant C7-3
7.3 Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Process and Storage Areas C7-3
7.4 Preliminary Hazard analysis for the Whole Plant in General C7-4
7.5 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index C7-5
7.6 Fire Explosion and Toxicity index for Storage Facilities C7-5
7.7 Damage due to Incident Radiation Intensities C7-6
7.8 Radiation Exposure and Lethality C7-7
7.9 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis C7-8
7.10 Details of NG/RLNG System C7-8
7.11 Properties of Fuels Considered for Modeling C7-8
7.12 Occurrence of Various Radiation Intensities - Fire Ball C7-10
7.13 Occurrence of Various Radiation Intensities - Pool Fire C7-11
7.14 Critical Concentrations for Chlorine C7-15
7.15 Dispersion Results for Chlorine Release - Nozzle Rupture C7-16
7.16 Area Likely to be Affected due to the Release of Chlorine C7-17
7.17 Off-Site Action Plan C7-33
9.1 Implementation Schedule C9-6
9.2 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures C9-7
10.1 Salient Features of Proposed Units C10-2
10.2 Environmental Setting of the Site C10-2

Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat 8 8h ho or ru uc ch h
F Fo ow we er r L L| |m m| |f fe ed d Chapter-1
Introduction

VIMTA Labs Limited, Hyderabad C1-1
1.0 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Purpose of the Report

Bharuch Power Limited, a wholly owned subsidiary of M/s Reliance Patalganga
Power Ltd., proposes to set up a large Combined Cycle Power Plant of the capacity
7200 MW in the State of Gujarat. The power plant is proposed at Khanpur-Deh
village, Jambusar taluka, Bharuch district of Gujarat.

As per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14
th

September, 2006 and amendment thereof , development of thermal power plants
(l500 MW) falls under category À under project type 1(D) and requires
Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from MoEF before the
commencement of ground activity.

The application to prior EC (Form-1) for the proposed project has been submitted
to MoEF and was considered in the 5
th
meeting of reconstituted Expert Appraisal
Committee (Thermal) held during September 6-7, 2010 in New Delhi to prescribe
Terms of Reference (TORs) for the preparation of EIA/EMP report. The Expert
Appraisal Committee prescribed the TORs for undertaking detailed EIA study vide
letter No. J-13012/104/2010-IA.II (T) dated October 12, 2010 and is enclosed as
Annexure-I.

Bharuch Power Limited has retained the services of M/s. Vimta Labs Limited,
Hyderabad to undertake EIA studies for assessing the impact of the proposed power
project on various environmental parameters in the study area and to prepare an
Environment Management Plan for negating the adverse impacts of the project to
obtain Environment Clearance from Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
Government of India, New Delhi and the Consent For Establishment (CFE) from
Gujarat State Pollution Control Board (GPCB) for the project. This EIA report is
prepared in the lines of EIA Notification dated 14
th
September, 2006 and the
amendments thereof.

1.2 Identification of Project and Project Proponent

1.2.1 Identification of Project

In order to augment the generation capacity in the state, Bharuch Power Limited,
a wholly owned subsidiary of M/s Reliance Patalganga Power Ltd., proposes to set
up a power project with capacity of 7200 MW in Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch
District, Gujarat. The plant shall be designed for base load operation and capable
of full range of operating conditions with a high availability and high overall
thermal efficiency in a cost effective manner. The power from the power station
switchyard will be evacuated through State/ Inter State grid.

The major advantage in planning the proposed Power Project may be summarized
below:

Proximity to NG trunk pipeline/LNG Terminal
Adequate barren land is available for the installation of the proposed Power
Plant with all facilities.
Introduction

Proximity to sea / Creek to use sea water
Natural Gas/RLNG are cleaner and environment friendly fuels
To reduce the Peak power shortage
Site is well connected by Rail, Road and Air.

Govt of Gujarat has given consent for facilitating land, water and other
infrastructure for the project and the consent letter is enclosed as Annexure-II.

1.2.2 Project Proponent

Anil Dhirubhai Ambani Group, through its group companies, is currently
developing 16 large and medium sized power projects with an aggregate capacity
of over 33,000 MW, one of the largest portfolios of power generation assets under
development in India, diverse in geographic location, fuel type, fuel source and
off-take.

The major companies of the group are:

Reliance Infrastructure Limited;
Reliance Power Limited;
Reliance Communication Limited;
Reliance Capital Limited;
Reliance Communication Ventures Limited;
Reliance Life Insurance Limited;
Reliance General Insurance Limited; and
Reliance Natural Resources Limited.

1.3 Brief Description of Project

1.3.1 Nature of the Project

Bharuch Power Limited proposes to set up 7200 MW natural gas fired CCPP plant.
The project will run on natural gas and / or R-LNG (Dual fuel) as a primary fuel
and HSD as an emergency fuel during non availability of primary fuel for a
maximum period of 3 days in a year.

1.3.2 Size of the Project

Bharuch Power Limited proposes the power plant of 7200 MW gas based CCPP
with a project cost of Rs. 25200 crores. It is proposed to achieve this capacity by
installation of 9 modules of 800MW capacity, each

1.3.3 Location of the Project

The proposed project site is located in Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar taluka,
Bharuch district, Gujarat at the northern bank of tidally influence Dhadhar
river/Creek. HTL/LTL/CRZ demarcation of the Project site has already been carried
out by the Institute of Environmental Studies and Wetland Management, Kolkata
(A MoEF recognised agency). The location map of the project and study area map
of 10 km radius of the proposed site are given in Figure-1.1 and Figure-1.2
respectively. The site photographs are shown in Figure-1.3. The geographical co-
Introduction

ordinates of the proposed project site are 2158'11.00"N latitude and
7245'52.00"E longitude. Boundary Coordinated of the project site are (A) 21 59
18.64 N 72 44 35.56 E; (B) 21 57 47.85 N 72 45 31.02 E; (D) 21 57
46.15 N 72 46 29.52 E; (E) 21 59 10.67 N 72 47 10.15 E.

1.3.4 Importance to the Country and Region

The review of the statistics reveals that there is a peak demand shortage of more
than 16% on all India basis. Notably there is an acute shortage in certain areas of
the country.

The peak demand shortage on all India basis for a period (April - July, 10) was
nearly 16434 MW. One must keep in view that the peak demand is actually
restricted demand and is likely to be higher.

Keeping the present scenario of shortages in energy and peak demand in view
and to maintain a GDP (Gross Domestic Product) growth of 8% to 10%, the
Government of India has very prudently set a target of about 2,12,000 MW of
power generation capacity by March, 2012.

Apart from a few of the stakeholders announcing plans for setting up the new
capacities, there remains a wide gap to be bridged towards achieving the target.
Hence, a project of the order of 7200 MW capacity is well justified in this context.
The power from this plant could be wheeled to the State government grid and the
industrial consumers.

It is therefore; imperative that important input like power is assured at all times,
to achieve the targeted production rates. The higher production would give
necessary fillip to the industrialization and consequently to the economic growth
of the country.

1.3.5 Supply and Demand Details

The total installed capacity in the country, at the end of 10
th
plan is 1,32,,329 MW
where as the peak demand during April,09 to Jan, 10 is around 1,18,746 MW.

Table-1.1 details the actual position of region wise energy supply position in the
country for the last year.

Introduction


FIGURE-1.1
INDEX MAP OF THE PROPOSED POWER PLANT
Introduction


FIGURE-1.2
STUDY AREA MAP (10 KM RADIUS)

JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
River / Nala
LEGEND
Railway Line Highway / Road
Project Site
Urban Area Settlements
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
S
H
-
6
S
H
-
6
N
Introduction


FIGURE-1.3
SITE PHOTOGRAPHS
Introduction

TABLE-1.1
REGION-WISE ENERGY SUPPLY POSITION

Region Installed
Capacity (as
on 31.03.10)
Peak Demand
Apr, 09-Mar,
10
Peak Demand (*)
2011/12
Northern 42189 37159 48,137
Western 50225 39609 47,108
Southern 43300 32082 40,367
Eastern 21319 13963 19,088
North-Eastern 2289 1760 2,537
Island 76 N.A. 77
All India 159398 122813 157,314
*Source: Power Supply Position, Central Electricity Authority

The peak demand shortage on all India bases, at the beginning of 2010, was
more than 15,000 MW.

Government of Gujarat plans to double the power generation capacity in the State
in the 12
th
Five Year Plan in order to keep pace with the energy demand, which is
expected to grow at 10% annually.

In conclusion it can be stated that the gap between availability of power and the
demand is not likely to be closed in the foreseeable future unless efforts are made
to add capacity in terms of power plants considering the fuel availability and
evacuation.

1.4 Scope of the Study

With a view to assess the environmental impacts due to the proposed plant,
Bharuch Power Limited have engaged, M/s. Vimta Labs Limited, Hyderabad as a
consultant to prepare EIA Report for various environmental components including
air, noise, water, land and biological components along with parameters of human
interest which may be affected and to prepare an EMP for mitigating adverse
impacts.

The EIA report is prepared based on one non-monsoon season baseline
environmental quality data as per the guidelines and requirements of MoEF,
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and Gujarat PCB.

Environmental baseline monitoring has been carried out during premonsoon
season (1
st
March to 31
st
May 2010) and used to identify potential significant
impacts. Modeling exercises have been carried out to predict and evaluate
impacts due to proposed power plant. An Environment Management Plan (EMP)
has been included in this report.

The scope of the study broadly includes:

Field sampling of environmental attributes at various representative locations in
the study area to establish the baseline environmental status;
Introduction

Collect and compile secondary data including socioeconomic data from
published literature / government publications;

Estimate pollution loads that would be generated by the proposed project;

Predict incremental levels of pollutants in the study area due to the proposed
project;

Evaluate the predicted impacts on the various environmental attributes by using
scientifically developed and widely accepted Environmental Impact Assessment
Modelling Methodologies;

Identification and assessment of risks associated with the proposed project and
their appropriate management through proper Risk Assessment (RA) and
Disaster Management Plans (DMP).

Prepare an Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted
impacts; and

Identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored during the
project execution and to suggest post project monitoring.

The scope also includes all the conditions outlined in the TOR issued by MOEF and
the compliance to the ToR is given in Table-1.2.

TABLE-1.2
COMPLIANCE TO TERMS OF REFERENCE

Report Reference Sr.
No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
1 Vision document specifying
prospective long term plan of the
site shall be formulated and
submitted.
The site is proposed to be utilized for
the development of power project to
be run for a long term
-
2 Executive summary of the project
indicating relevant details along
with photograph of site shall be
provided and issues raised in
public hearing along with action
plan to address the same shall be
provided in tabular form including
requisite allocation of funds.
Shall be complied. The public hearing
is proposed to be carried out as per
the EIA notification 2006 and ToR
condition and the action plan shall be
prepared accordingly.
Executive summary,
Page E-1
3 The possibility to adopt NIOT
technology for utilizing sea water
through Low Temperature Thermal
Desalination (LTTD) process shall
be examined and details furnished.
In case the same is not feasible
detailed explanation shall be
submitted.
Based on techno-economics and
reliability studies, the best and proven
desalination technology, to be
adopted for the project, shall be
decided during the details engineering
of the project. The details of the
desalination plant are given in
Chapter-2
Section-2.7.8, Page-
C2-11
4 Conformity of the site with the
prescribed guidelines in terms of
distance of 500 m from HFL of the
river, highways, railway line shall
be shown on the study area map.
The study area map with all the
details is given in Chapter-1
Section-1.3.3,
Figure-1.2, Page-C1-
5
Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
5 The project proponent shall
provide confirmed GPS readings of
plant boundary.
The coordinates of the plant are as
given in Chapter-2:
(A) 21 59 18.64 N 72 44 35.56 E
(B) 21 57 47.85 N 72 45 31.02 E
(C) 21 57 46.15 N 72 46 29.52 E
(D) 21 59 10.67 N 72 47 10.15 E
Section-2.3, Table-
2.1, Page-C2-1
6 No water body/nallah (if any) shall
be touched. It shall also be
ensured that atleast 100 m
distance is kept away from the HFL
of the nallah/ river (if any) passing
in and around the proposed site.
There is no nallah/river passing
through the site. The Dhadhar river
passes along the south of the site at a
distance of 500m. The study area
map with all the details is given in
Chapter-1.
Section-1.3.3,
5
7 CRZ demarcation of HTL, LTL etc.
by an authorized agency (as
applicable) shall carried out and
submitted. Copy of CRZ clearance
/ application for facilities
permissible under CRZ notification
shall be furnished (as applicable).
CRZ demarcation for the project has
already been carried out by the
Institute of Environmental Studies and
Wetland Management, Kolkata.
Permitted facilities to be carried out in
CRZ area are water intake/discharge
pipelines and structures, gas pipelines
etc the details are given in Chapter-2.
Section-2.3, Page-
C2-2
8 Hydro-geological study of the area
shall be conducted from an
institute/ organisation of repute to
assess impact of on ground and
surface water regime. Specific
mitigation measures shall be spelt
out and action plan for
implementation of the same shall
be provided.
9 Source sustainability study of
water requirement shall be carried
out by an institute of repute. The
study shall also specify the source
of water for meeting the
requirement during lean season
and proposed plan of action.
Sea water is proposed to be used to
cater both condenser cooling and raw
water requirement of the project.
No sweet water resources shall be
stress for the project sea water
desalination shall be used to cater raw
water requirement.
There will not be any impact on the
ground water resources, as there is
no proposal to use ground water for
plant requirement
C2-13

10 Study on the impact on
river/reservoir/marine ecology (as
applicable) due to the proposed
discharge of treated wastewater
into the river/creek shall be carried
out and submitted alongwith the
EIA Report.
Intake and outfall locations are
proposed to be located in the Dhadhar
River.

In view of proposed project site in the
downstream of regional natural
drainage, in coastal zone, as well as
the proposed treatment of wastewater
to comply prescribed standards, the
water pollution impacts in 10 km
radial distance would be negligible the
details are given in Chapter-4
C4-8
11 Action plan for identification of
local employable youth for training
in skills relevant to the project for
eventual employment in the
project itself shall be formulated.
The CSR activities proposed to be
carried out by Bharuch Power Limited
in surrounding villages have been
identified and given in Chapter-8.

Section-8.5, Page-
C8-3
12 Layout of the plant indicating
break-up of plant, green belt,
infrastructure, roads etc. shall be
provided. Land for TPP shall be
optimized and moved away from
Creek /low lying areas.
Layout of the proposed power project
units have been optimised within the
plant premises, considering the space
requirements for all the equipment,
systems, buildings, structures, fuel
storage area including, raw water
storage tank, water treatment plant,
cooling water pump house etc and are
Section-2.3.1,
5
Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
planned away from creek/low lying
areas
13 Land use based on satellite
imagery or authenticated map
indicating drainage, cropping
pattern, water bodies (rivers,
nallahs, ponds etc.), location of
nearest villages, creeks,
mangroves, rivers, reservoirs,
national parks, wildlife sanctuaries,
tiger reserves, biosphere reserves,
heritage sites etc in the study area
shall be provided. Location of any
National Park, Sanctuary,
Elephant/Tiger Reserve (existing
as well as proposed), migratory
routes etc., if any, within 10 km of
the project site shall be specified
and marked on the map duly
authenticated by the Chief Wildlife
Warden.
Land use based on satellite imagery
has been prepared and included in
Chapter-3
Section-3.4.4,
Figure-3.4.2, Page-
C3-7
14 Study on land-use pattern in the
study area shall be carried out,
including identification of common
property resources available for
conversion into productive land
and action plan for abatement and
compensation for damage to
agricultural land/ common
property land (if any) in the
nearby villages, due to proposed
project shall be prepared.
The land use of the study area is
studied by analyzing the available
secondary data like census records,
agricultural census and land records
for the year 2001. The methodology
adopted for the study mainly includes
review of published secondary data,
the study area comes under
Jambusar, Amod and Vagra talukas of
Bharuch district in Gujarat state such
as the District Census Statistics of
2001, Bharuch district of Gujarat state
and the details are included in
Chapter-3.
The land requirement for plant is
around 1900 acre (769 ha). The site
is almost plain and barren. The
nearby villages land will not be
affected in anyway by the proposed
project.
C3-3
15 Detailed socio-economic study
shall be carried out for the study
area comprising of 10 km from the
plant site.
The information on socioeconomic
aspects of the study area has been
compiled from secondary sources,
which include various public offices.
The methodology adopted for the
study mainly includes review of
published secondary data, the study
area comes under Jambusar, Amod
and Vagra talukas of Bharuch district
in Gujarat state such as the District
Census Statistics of 2001, Bharuch
district of Gujarat state for the
parameters of demography,
occupational structure of people
within the study area of 10 km radial
distance from the periphery of the
proposed Project site and the details
are included in Chapter-3.
Section-3.11, Page-
C3-53
16 Impact on traditional fishing shall
be studied and action plan for
No impact is envisaged and the details
of impact on water resources and
Section-4.3.4 &
Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
implementation of schemes for
providing sustainable alternative
livelihood to fishermen community
affected due to proposed project
(as applicable) shall be submitted.
water quality are given in Chapter-4 Section-4.3.5, Page-
C4-8
17 CSR component shall be prepared
based on need based assessment
study to be carried out in the study
area. Income generating
measures which can help in
upliftment of poorer sections of
society which is consistent with the
traditional skills of the people shall
be identified. The programme can
include activities such as
development of fodder farm, fruit
bearing orchards, vocational
training etc. In addition,
vocational training for individuals
shall be imparted so that poorer
sections of society can take up self
employment and jobs. Separate
budget for community
development activities and income
generating programmes shall be
specified. Financial allocation to be
taken up under CSR shall be
specified.

Proposed CSR Budget:

Capital: 7.2 Crores
Recurring: 1.5 Crores
Section-8.5, Page-
C8-3
18 While formulating CSR schemes it
shall be ensured that an in-built
monitoring mechanism for the
schemes identified is in place and
mechanism for conducting annual
social audit from the nearest
government institute of repute in
the region shall be prepared. The
project proponent shall also
provide plan for the status of
implementation of the scheme
from time to time.

Section-8.5, Page-
C8-3
19 Possibility for adopting villages
within 5 km radius shall be
explored and details of civic
amenities such as roads, drinking
water, power etc proposed to be
provided at the companys
expenses shall be submitted.

Proposed CSR Budget:

Capital: 7.2 Crores
Recurring: 1.5 Crores
Section-8.5, Page-
C8-3
20 Location of intake and outfall
points (with coordinates) should be
given. Impact on marine/river
ecology study (as applicable) shall
be carried out from an institute of
repute and Marine EIA report/EMP
submitted.
Intake and outfall locations are
proposed to be located in the Dhadhar
River.

CRZ demarcation for the project has
already been carried out by the
Institute of Environmental Studies and
Wetland Management, Kolkata.

Permitted facilities to be carried out in
CRZ area are water intake/discharge
pipelines and structures, gas pipelines
Section-2.3, Page-
C2-2
Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
etc.

In view of proposed project site in the
downstream of regional natural
drainage, in coastal zone as well as
the proposed treatment of wastewater
to comply prescribed standards, the
water pollution impacts in 10 km
radial distance would be negligible.
21 Topography of the area should be
given clearly indicating whether
the site requires any filling. If so,
details of filling, quantity of fill
material required, its source,
transportation etc. should be
given.
Site elevation is 5-6 m AMSL
The site is almost flat in nature hence
no major filling is envisaged and the
details are given in Chapter-2
C2-2
22 One complete season AAQ data
(except monsoon) to be given
along with the dates of monitoring.
The parameters to be covered shall
include SPM, RSPM (PM10,PM2.5),
SO2, NOx, Hg and Ozone (ground
level). The location of the
monitoring stations should be so
decided so as to take into
consideration the pre-dominant
downwind direction, population
zone and sensitive receptors
including reserved forests. There
should be at least one monitoring
station each in the upwind and in
the pre dominant downwind
direction at a location where
maximum ground level
concentration is likely to occur.
Environmental baseline monitoring
has been carried out during
premonsoon season (1
st
March to 31
st

May 2010). Ambient Air Quality
Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set
up at ten locations with due
consideration and the details are
included in Chapter-3
Section-3.6, Page-
C3-19
23 Cumulative impact assessment on
ambient air quality due to
proposed plant and others
(including existing as well as other
proposed source of emission) in
the study area shall be carried out
and result submitted in the EIA
Report. Mitigative measures as
necessary shall be clearly spelt
out.
The cumulative impact assessment on
air quality is assessed based on
emissions of the proposed gas based
power project and the surrounding
industries and the appropriate
Mitigative measures are suggested,
the details are included in Chapter-4
C4-5
C4-21
24 Impact of the project on the AAQ
of the area. Details of the model
used and the input data used for
modelling should also be provided.
The air quality contours may be
plotted on a location map showing
the location of project site,
habitation nearby, sensitive
receptors, if any. The wind roses
should also be shown on this map.
Prediction of impacts on air
environment has been carried out
employing mathematical model
Industrial Source Complex [ISC3]
dispersion model has been used for
simulations from point sources.
The isopleths for NOx emissions for
premonsoon season is given in
Chapter-4.
C4-5, Figure-4.1.
25 Fuel analysis shall be provided.
Details of auxillary fuel, if any
including its quantity, quality,
storage etc should also be given.
The typical fuel analysis data for
Natural Gas, RLNG and HSD are
furnished in Chapter-2. It is also
envisaged to use HSD as emergency
fuel during non availability of the
Natural gas/RLNG for a maximum
C2-14

C7-3
Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
period of 3 days in a year. The details
are given in Chapter-2 and Chapter-7.
26 Quantity of fuel required, its
source and transportation route
and mode and a confirmed fuel
linkage documents shall be
provided.
The quantity of fuel required, its
source and transportation route and
mode details are given in Chapter-2.
C2-14

27 Source of fresh water and its
availability. Commitment regarding
availability of requisite quantity of
water from the competent
authority shall be provided along
with firm linkage.
Sea water after Desalination shall be
used to cater the demand of raw
water for the project
C2-13
28 Detailed plan for carrying out
rainwater harvesting and proposed
utilisation in the plant shall be
provided.
Rain water harvesting structures are
proposed to recharge the ground
water resources in the region. The
runoff water from the roof of the
structures and paved areas will be
collected and led to the rain water
harvesting structures. The final
location of structures shall be decided
during details engineering of the
project
Section-4.4.3.3,
Page-C4-25

29 Feasibility of zero discharge shall
be examined and detailed
justification shall be submitted if in
case the same is not possible.
Proposed discharge (if any), its
quantity, quality and point of
discharge, users downstream etc.
shall be provided.
The treated waste water shall be
utilized to the maximum extent
possible within the plant premises.
Wastewater generation, utilization and
disposal details have been discussed
in Chapter-4
C4-10

30 Optimization of COC for water
conservation. Other water
conservation measures proposed
in the project should also be given.
Quantity of water requirement for
the project should be optimized.
Sea water is proposed to be used for
the condenser cooling.
Water conservation measures are
discussed in Chapter-4
Section-4.4.3.2,
Page-C4-21

31 Details of water balance taking into
account reuse and re-circulation of
effluents.
The treated waste water shall be
utilized to the maximum extent
possible within the plant premises.
Wastewater generation, utilization and
disposal details has been discussed in
Chapter-4
C4-10

32 Detailed plan for conducting
monitoring of water quality
regularly and mechanism for
maintenance of records shall be
formulated. Details of methodology
and identification of monitoring
points (between the plant and
drainage in the direction of flow of
surface / ground water) shall be
submitted. It shall be ensured that
parameter to be monitored also
include heavy metals in surface
and ground water.
The post project monitoring details
have been discussed in Chapter-6
Section-6.2, Page-
C6-1

33 Details regarding infrastructure
facilities such as sanitation, fuel,
restroom, medical facilities, safety
during construction phase etc. to
be provided to the labour force
The Infrastructure facilities for labour
force during construction and these
facilities shall be extended to causal
workers and truck drivers during
operation phase. The details are
C2-19

Introduction

No
Comments
Chapter
Section & Page
during construction as well as to
the casual workers including truck
drivers during operation phase.
34 EMP to mitigate the adverse
impacts due to the project along
with item wise cost of its
implementation.
The EMP alongwith environment
protection cost are dicussed in
Chapter-4 and Chapter-9
C4-21
35 A Disaster Management Plan along
with risk assessment study
including fire and explosion issues
due to storage and use of fuel
should be carried out. It should
take into account the maximum
inventory of storage at site at any
point in time. The risk contours
should be plotted on the plant
layout map clearly showing which
of the proposed activities would be
affected in case of an accident
taking place. Based on the same,
proposed safeguard measures
should be provided. Measures to
guard against fire hazards should
also be provided.
The identification of various hazards,
probable risks in the proposed
project, risk analysis, and disaster
management plan are addressed in
Chapter-7
Section-7.0, Page-
C7-1
36 Detailed plan for raising Green belt
of 100 m width and consisting of
at least 3 tiers around plant
boundary with tree density not less
than 2500 trees per ha and
survival rate atleast 75% shall be
submitted.
The greenbelt development details are
Section-4.4.3.6,
Page-C4-28
37 Details of litigation pending or
otherwise with respect to project in
any courts, tribunal etc. shall be
provided.
There are no litigations on the
proposed project.
-

Chapter-2
Project Description

2.0 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

This chapter deals with the details of the proposed power project and associated
infrastructures etc.

2.1 Type of the Project

Bharuch Power Limited proposes to install 7200 MW gas based CCPP at Khanpur-
deh village, Jambusar taluka, Bharuch district of Gujarat. It is envisaged that
natural gas for the power plant station would be obtained by proposed gas
pipeline route of KGD basin of Reliance Industries Limited (RIL) and RLNG supply
by Dahej /Hazira LNG Terminal.

2.2 Need for the Project

In order to keep pace with energy demand, expected to grow 10% annually, the
Government of Gujarat (GoG) plans to double the power generation capacity in
the state in the 12
th
Five Year Plan. The proposed power project by Bharuch
Power Ltd. would contribute in making Gujarat state a "Power Generation Hub.

2.3 Location of the Project

The proposed project site is located in Khanpur-deh village, Jambusar taluka,
Bharuch district, Gujarat. The environmental setting of the site is given in Table-
2.1.
TABLE-2.1
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

Sr. No. Particulars Details
Plant Location
Village Khanpur-Deh
Taluka Jambusar
District Bharuch
1
State Gujarat
2 Plant Site Coordinates (A) 21 59 18.64 N 72 44 35.56 E
(B) 21 57 47.85 N 72 45 31.02 E
(C) 21 57 46.15 N 72 46 29.52 E
(D) 21 59 10.67 N 72 47 10.15 E
3 Plant site elevation above MSL 5-6 m above MSL
4 Survey of India Toposheet No 46 B/16
5 Plant Site Topography Generally plain
6 Nearest Highway SH-6 (4.1 km SE);
NH-8 (39 km E)
7 Nearest Railway Station Jambusar RS (5.5 km NNE)
8 Nearest Airport Vadodara (65 km NE)
9 Nearest Seaport Dahej port (30 km SSW)
10 Nearest river Dhadhar river (0.5 km S)
11 Nearest Town/City Jambusar (5.5 km NNE)
12 Nearest Village Khanpur Deh (0.3 km N)
13 Villages within 1 km radius Khanpur Deh (0.3 km N)
14 Distance from the sea coast Gulf of Khambhat (25 km W)
15 Hills/Valleys No hills and valleys within 10 km radius
16 Archaeologically important places None within 10 km radius
Chapter-2
Project Description

17 Protected areas as per Wildlife
Protection Act,1972
None within 10 km radius

18 Reserved/ Protected Forests None within 10 km radius
19 Seismicity Seismic Zone-III as per IS 1893 (Part I):
2002
20 Defence Installations None within 10 km radius area
Note: All distances mentioned are aerial distances

The project is located at the northern bank of tidally influenced Dhadhar
River/Creek. Therefore in compliance to the CRZ Notification 1991 (with subsequent
amendments), LTL/HTL/CRZ demarcation of the entire project site has already been
carried out by Institute of Environmental Studies and Wetland Development
(IESWM), Kolkata (A MoEF recognized agency). The main findings of IESWM with
respect to the project site are as follows:

Project site is a largely open or vacant land with laterite soil
Project boundary is out side the CRZ, hence no restriction under CRZ Notification
- 1991
Intertidal area identified as CRZ I(ii) while other CRZ areas are of CRZ III
category
The width of CRZ along project site shall be
o 150 mts for Dhadhar River
o 100 mts for the creek on North side
No ecologically sensitive areas like mangroves, coral reefs etc.

The CRZ map, as prepared by IESWM, is attached herewith vide Figure-2.1.

2.3.1 Layout of the Proposed Project

The land requirement for plant is around 1900 acre (769 ha). The site is almost
plain, barren at an elevation of about 5-6 m above MSL and is suitable to locate
major heavy structures, buildings and foundations. The plant plot plan showing
proposed units is presented in Figure-2.2.

The topography of the land at project site is almost plain. Depending on the detail
contour survey and safe grade elevation/storm water drainage studies the
general grade level of the area, to be built, shall be decided.

Layout of the proposed power project units have been optimised within the plant
premises, considering the space requirements for all the equipment, systems,
buildings, structures, fuel storage area including, raw water storage tank, water
treatment plant, cooling water pump house etc. In laying out various facilities
within the plant, following general aspects have been taken into consideration:

Availability of adequate barren land for erecting units;
Provision to install proposed power project units;
Predominant wind directions to minimise pollution, fire risk etc;
Raw water supply and storage facilities; and
Availability of adequate space for fabrication / construction equipment.
Chapter-2
Project Description

All facilities of the project area will be laid out in close proximity to each other to
the extent practicable so as to minimize the land requirement. The layout
facilitates movement of men and materials between various facilities both during
construction and operation. Necessary plant drainage system would be provided
at the project site. However, adequate plant facilities will be erected for the
smooth and efficient functioning of the proposed project.

CRZ demarcation for the project has already been carried out by the Institute of
Environmental Studies and Wetland Management, Kolkata. Permissible facilities to
be carried out in CRZ area are water intake/discharge pipelines and associated
structures, gas pipelines etc.

2.4 Plant Size and Operation Details

Proposed power project capacity of 7200 MW is envisaged to be achieved by
installation of 9 modules of 800MW capacity, each. The salient features of
proposed 7200 MW power project are given in Table-2.2.

2.5 Proposed Schedule and Approval for Implementation

Successful execution of the project largely depends on the coordinated approach
of the project implementing agencies. Proper coordination between the various
project execution agencies, monitoring of project schedules, appropriate
mobilization of manpower and other resources can achieve effective cost control
and timely completion of the project.
The broad time frame required for implementation and completion of the project
would be 27-43 months from the date of financial closure after obtaining all
necessary clearances.

2.6 Process Description

"Combined cycle power plant integrates two power conversion cycles - Brayton
Cycle (gas turbine) and Rankine cycle (steam turbine) with the principal objective
of increasing overall plant efficiency.

Simple cycle gas turbine generators, when operated as independent electric
power producers, are relatively inefficient with net heat rates at full load of over
2500 Kcal/KWh, with an efficiency of around 35%.

Brayton Cycle - Gas turbine plants operate on this cycle in which air is
compressed. This compressed air is heated in the combustor by burning fuel,
where part of compressed air is used for combustion and the flue gases produced
are allowed to expand in the turbine which is coupled with the generator. In
modern gas turbines the temperature of exhaust is in the range of 600
o
C.

Chapter-2
Project Description


\

FIGURE-2.1
CRZ DEMARCATION MAP
Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.2
PLANT LAYOUT PLAN
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
N
E
N
W
S
S
E
S
W
W
E
P
L
A
N
T
N
O
R
T
H
C
A
L
M
W
IN
D
R
O
S
E
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
c
o
o
c
.n
o

:
o
w
t
s
.
-
o
v
-

o
o
s
t
-
:
.
o
v

-
c
/
n
:

s

t
:
-
w / t - o o s t
c / c o o c o c o n \
P U M P
H O U S E
t--cotn:
o.sc/ot
o / s - . - t
c . n t
swtt: w/:t
.n:/st -.-tc.nt
s t / w / : t
. n : / s t - . - t c . n t
o
t
s
/
c
.n
/
:
.o
n

-
c
/
n
:
Chapter-2
Project Description

TABLE-2.2
SALIENT FEATURES OF PROPOSED UNITS

Sr. No. Features Details
1 Plant Capacity 7200 MW (Natural Gas & / or R-LNG (Dual fuel)
2 Configuration 9 x800 MW modules
3 Gas / RLNG Supply RILs KGD Basin / Dahej/Hazira LNG Terminal
4 Fuel requirement Natural Gas or RLNG - 28.0 Million SM
3
/day (MMSCMD)
5 Alternate Fuel HSD
6 Plant Area Around 1900 acre (769 ha)
7 Water Requirement 500 MLD
8 Raw Water Source Desalination (Dhadhar River as sea water source)
9 Sea water source Dhadhar river (intake point at 6 km)
10 Manpower Requirement 250
Source: Project Report
MLD: Million Litres/Day

Rankine Cycle - The conversion of heat energy to mechanical energy with aid of
steam is based on this thermodynamic cycle. The initial state of working fluid is
water which at a certain temperature is pressurized by a pump and fed to the
boiler. In the boiler, the pressurized water is heated at constant pressure.
Superheated steam is expanded in the steam turbine plant which is coupled with
a generator. Modern steam power plants have a steam temperature in range of
550
o
C at the inlet of the turbine.

As gas turbine exhaust temperature and the temperature required to generate
steam for steam turbine are in the same range, gas turbine exhaust heat can be
recovered using a waste heat recovery boiler to run a steam turbine on Rankine
cycle.

The combination of these two cycles in a Combined Cycle Power Plant enhances
the overall cycle efficiency to the tune of 55 to 60%. The process flow diagram of
the proposed plant is given in Figure-2.3.

2.7 Project Description

2.7.1 Combined Cycle Plant

The net capacity of the combined cycle plant with possible configurations are
indicated in Table-2.3 and shown in Figure-2.4. However final selection of
power plant capacity & configuration will depend on

Operating experience of such unit.
Load demand cycle
Performance guarantee parameters
Techno-economic study based on Original Equipment Manufacturers (OEM)
offers

The final selection will be carried out based on techno-economic evaluation of the
offer received from reputed OEMs.

Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.3
PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAM
Desalination
Plant
Sea
Water
Sea Water
Sea Water outfall
from cold end
Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.3 (A)
SINGLE SHAFT CCPP (1 GT + 1 HRSG + 1 ST)
Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.3 (B)
MULTI SHAFT CCPP (2 GTG + 2 HRSG + 1 STG)
Chapter-2
Project Description

TABLE-2.3
CONFIGURATION OF PROPOSED UNITS

Configuration Item Alstom GE Siemens Mitsubishi
GT Model GT26 B 9FA 9FB SCC5-4000F M701F
2 GTG +
2 HRSG + 1

STG
Combined cycle
net output (ISO)
857.7 MW 786.9 MW
872.0
MW
848 MW 930.0 MW

2.7.2 Gas Turbine Generator Set (GTG)

The gas turbine generator set for this station shall be 50 Hz machines. The sets
shall be Advanced Class heavy duty, with inline compressor and gas turbine
construction. The gas turbines shall be designed to operate normally on natural
gas. The other plant interface requirements will normally be limited to supply of
fuel, cooling water, instrument air, power supply to auxiliaries, control and
instrumentation signals interface and power evacuation system for generator.

2.7.2.1 Gas Turbine Emission Control System and Noise Control

The significant products of combustion in gas turbine emissions may be oxides of
nitrogen, carbon monoxide, and unburned hydrocarbons. Since natural gas/RLNG
are comparatively clean and environment friendly fuels, the emissions released to
atmosphere is expected to be very low. DLN burner (Dry Low NOx) is proposed
to be used with low NOx emission and that may also improve the maintainability
of the gas turbines.

The gas turbine may have a sound proof enclosure for arresting noise in the
machine hall as per the internationally acceptable standards.

2.7.3 Heat Recovery Steam Generator (HRSG)

Triple pressure, unfired, natural circulation HRSG shall be provided. For best
efficiency and minimum temperature fluctuation, the ST and HRSG shall be
designed for sliding pressure operation over a wide range in response to the GT
load variation.

2.7.4 Steam Turbine Generator (STG)

The steam turbine shall be tailor made to suit maximum steam output from HRSG
system. The steam turbine will be re-heat type 3000 RPM condensing set. Steam
(HP, IP & LP) from HRSG will be through the respective emergency stop and
control valves, which will be either hydraulically or electro-hydraulically controlled

2.7.5 Condensing Equipment and Accessories

Water cooled condenser shall be divided flow, double pass, horizontal, surface
type. Condenser unit will condense exhaust steam by circulation of cooling water
in a re-circulating cooling water system using wet type cooling tower

Chapter-2
Project Description

The condenser may be provided with vacuum pumps to remove non-condensable
gases and maintain vacuum in the condenser at the desired level.

2.7.6 Condensate Extraction Pumps

The condensate/feed water cycle may also comprise two 100% capacity motor
driven, vertical condensate extraction pumps of CAN-type construction.
Connection between condenser and each pump will be through a block valve and
removable strainer. The pumps shall discharge through check valve and motor
operated stop valves into a common discharge header.

2.7.7 Boiler Feed Pump

The feed water heating system shall comprise electric motor driven boiler feed
pumps (for HP & LP of HRSG) of centrifugal, multi-stage, horizontal, barrel type
construction. The head, capacity and net positive suction head (NPSH) shall be
so selected as to permit parallel operation at all loads and be compatible with the
heat cycle considered to meet the boiler MCR without encroaching on normal
margins. The pumps shall be provided with mechanical seal flushing arrangement
as per API 610. The supply shall be complete with lube oil system, automatic
leak-off, minimum flow recirculation valves, bypass valves, base plates,
foundation bolts, couplings, 6.6 kV, 3 pH, 50Hz electric motor drive.

All pumps and auxiliaries rating shall be 20% higher than MCR condition.

2.7.8 Other Plant Systems

Raw Water System

It is envisaged to use sea water as cooling medium for the project. Sea water for
the project shall be drawn from Dhadhar River/Creek. Bharuch Power Ltd. would
obtain necessary approvals for the GoG for drawing sea water from Dhadhar
River. Government of Gujarat has given "in principle project approval and
consent on facilitating land, water and other infrastructures for the project.

A desalination plant is also envisaged to be installed to meet the raw water
requirements for plant and boiler make up. Based on techno-economics and
reliability studies, the best and proven desalination technology, to be adopted for
the project, shall be decided during the detailed engineering of the project.

Reservoir for desalined raw water is also envisaged to be constructed at the site
with capacity to cater for 7 days, operation for meeting the water requirement in
the case of non availability of water for obvious reasons.

Cooling water system

Re-circulating type cooling water system with induced draft cooling towers has
been envisaged for the project.

Chapter-2
Project Description

Make system shall be able to meet the complete makeup water requirement of
the CW system.

Compressed Air System

Compressed air system shall be capable of supplying service air and instrument
air for various locations for the plant.

For service air, cetrifugal/screw/reciprocating type air compressor shall be
envisaged. The atmospheric air will be compressed @ 7-8kg/cm
2
in the
compressor then stored in the air receiver and supplied to the various locations.

For instrument air requirement of main plant and auxiliary, air compressors with
Air Drying Plants (ADP) of same capacity are envisaged.

Fire Fighting system

A comprehensive fire detection and protection system is envisaged for the
completer power station. This system shall be as per the recommendations of IS:
3034 & NPFA-850.

Chemical feed/treatment system

The water treatment system for the project comprises of pretreatment plant, de-
mineralization (DM) plant, chlorination plant and CW treatment plant.

Chlorination plant shall be provided for chlorination dosing in the raw water and
CW system to avoid the growth of algae and bacteria.

The complete installation of chlorine handling shall be as per CCE (Chief
Controller of Explosive) guidelines. In addition, chlorine absorption system with
adequate chlorine detectors shall be provided to handle chlorine leak, if any.

It is also envisaged to provide suitable chemical treatment for circulating water to
control its pH by acid dosing. If the water is of scaling nature, then anti scaling
agents shall be dosed to maintain the circulating water chemistry.

Pollution Monitoring System

In order to meet the environmental norms, the plant design shall be with
sufficient margins for all the operating conditions. Continuous monitoring
equipments for stack emissions are envisaged to be provided. Emissions may be
controlled well with in the prescribed norms through well proven state of the art
protection technologies.

All effluents from raw water treatment plant, DM Plant and power plant &
transformer yard shall be collected in Central Monitoring Basin (CMB) and finally
shall be disposed off as per the prevailing norms. Efforts shall be made to
reuse/re-circulate the process water to the maximum extent. The portion of the
treated effluent shall be used for greenbelt development.
Chapter-2
Project Description

HSD Storage

Fifteen HSD storage tanks of 7500 KL capacity shall be envisaged for the
proposed 7200MW CCPP.

2.8 Resources and Utilities Requirement

The details of various resources and utilities required for the proposed power
project are given in following sections:

2.8.1 Land Requirement

The land requirement for the proposed power plant Jambusar CCPP is 1900 acre
(769 ha). The land use breakup of the proposed plant is given in Table-2.4. The
plant land usage is in line with CEA norms.

TABLE-2.4
LANDUSE BREAKUP AT THE PROJECT SITE

Sr. No. Description Area (Acres)
1 Main Plant 215
2 1 breaker switchyard 250
3 Water system (pump house facility and cooling towers) 150
4 Water Treatment Plant 50
5 Fuel facilities 15
6 Lay down area 120
7 Storage Yard 100
8 Desalination plant 150
9 Pipeline corridor 70
10 Roads 60
Sub Total Plant Area 1180
11 Township 250
Sub Total Non Plant Area 250
12 Green Belt 470
Total 1900

2.8.2 Water Requirement and Source

In a Combined Cycle Power Plant, water is needed to meet the following demands.

a. Cooling water for steam condenser, which is the part of heat sink for the
thermodynamic cycle. This system in a power station is the largest consumer
of water.
b. Cooling water for STG & HRSG auxiliaries, compressors, D.G. sets, A.C. System
etc.
c. Cooling of Gas Turbine auxiliary equipment.
d. Dry low NOx combustion (DLN Burner) has been proposed for the proposed Gas
Turbines
e. Make-up water for power cycle (HRSG make-up).

Chapter-2
Project Description

The closed cooling water system is envisaged with induced draft cooling towers.

Considering the scarcity of water in the state of Gujarat, sea water is envisaged to
be used for condenser cooling which may be taken from adjoining Dhadhar
River/Creek. Sea water requirement for the project is about 500MLD.

Also the raw water requirement for the project, of about 30 MLD, shall be met from
Desalination. The water balance is shown in Figure-2.4.

From the analysis of raw water, conventional treatment viz., clarifloculation and
demineralization would be necessary.

On the basis of above, the estimated consumptive water requirement is given in
Table-2.5.
TABLE-2.5
ESTIMATED CONSUMPTIVE WATER REQUIREMENT

S. No. Description Requirement
1 Sea water requirement for condenser cooling 425.0 MLD
2 Sweet water requirement the plant usage (desalination) 30.0 MLD
3 Total water requirement with desalination ~ 500.0 MLD

2.8.3 Fuel Requirement and Source

The requirement of Natural Gas or R-LNG for 7200 MW is estimated about 28
Million SM
3
/day (MMSCMD).

It is also envisaged to use HSD as emergency fuel during non availability of the
Natural gas/RLNG for a maximum period of 3 days in a year.

The typical fuel analysis data for Natural Gas, RLNG and HSD are furnished in
Table-2.6, Table-2.7 and Table-2.8.

TABLE-2.6
TYPICAL NATURAL GAS COMPOSITION

Sr. No. Description % Volume
1 (Methane) C1 99.55
2 (Ethane) C2 0.13
3 (Propane) C3 0.06
4 (Hexanes) C6 0.03
5 (Heptane) C7 0.04
6 Carbon dioxide 0.07
7 Nitrogen 0.12
8 H2S NIL
8 Calorific Value 8147 kCal/Sm
3

9 Sp. Gravity 0.68

Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.4
WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM
Chapter-2
Project Description

TABLE-2.7
INDICATIVE R-LNG SPECIFICATIONS

Composition
1 Methane 88.00 mol% minimum
2 Ethane 1.50 mol%minimum/6.00mol% maximum
3 Propane and heavier 3.50 mol% maximum
4 Butanes and heavier 2.00 mol% maximum
5 Pentanes and heavier 0.10 mol% maximum
6 Nitrogen 1.00 mol% maximum
7 Carbon dioxide 100 ppm-mol maximum
8 Oxygen 50 ppm-mol maximum
9 Hydrogen sulphide 5 mg/Nm
3
maximum
10 Mercaptan sulphur 7 mg/Nm
3
maximum
11 Total sulphur (including mercaptans) 30 mg/Nm
3
maximum
Trace Metals
12 Pb + Zn Max. 0.50 ppm (wt)
13 Na + K Max. 0.30 ppm (wt)
14 Vanadium Max. 0.50 ppm
15 Calcium Max. 2.0 ppm(wt.)
16 Magnesium Max. 2.0 ppm(wt)
17 Sum of Heavy Metals Max. 1.0 ppm (wt)
Moisture
18 Moisture 112 Kg/million SM
3
(Max.)
Others
19 Wobbe Index (Min/max) 1360-1440 Btu/SCF

TABLE-2.8
TYPICAL DATA SHEET FOR HSD

Parameters UOM Test Methods HSD (Typical)
Acidity, inorganic mg KOH/g max P2 Nil
Acidity, Total mg KOH/g max P2 0.15
Ash %wt max P4 < 0.002
RCR on 10% residue %wt max P 8 0.1
Cetane Index min D 4737 46
Pour point a) Summer
b) winter
deg C max P 10 0 0
Cold Filter Plugging Point a) Summer
b) Winter
deg C max P110 3
3
Density @ 15 deg C Kg/cu.m P16 856
Distillation E 350 deg C
Distillation E 370 deg C
% vol, min P18 85
95
Flash point Abel deg C min P 20/21 60
Kinematic viscosity, cSt @ 40
o
C cSt P 25 3.3
Sediments %wt max P 30 0.05
Total Sulphur %wt max IP 336 0.25
Water Content % vol max P 40 0.04
Cu strip corrosion 3hrs@ 100
o
C max P 15 1b
Total sediments mg / 100ml, max UOP 413-82 1.5
Lubricity, WSD
1.4
@ 60 deg C Microns, max ISO 12156 460

Chapter-2
Project Description

The Natural Gas and RLNG can be made available to the project site from RILs
KG basin gas fields and Dahej/Hazira LNG terminal, respectively. The gas/RLNG
may be transported to the project site by spur pipeline from the nearest tapping
location on East West pipeline (EWPL)/ Dahej Vijapur Pipeline (DVPL) and RLNG
terminals.

The nearest tapping point location on EWPL/DVPL is located at LSV - 2 at Ankot
village, Vagra Taluka, Bharuch District at a distance of about 21 km. Map showing
gas pipeline route is shown in Figure-2.5.

2.8.4 Power Evacuation

Based upon the power generation capacity of 7200 MW, power evacuation is
envisaged to be at the grid voltage of 400/765kV. Evacuation of power beyond
gantry of the power plant may be with 400/765kV switchyard and integration with
the grid shall be taken care by STU/CTU.

2.8.5 Infrastructure

Based on the detailed site selection study, a location covering complete barren
land (around 1900 Acre (769 ha)) near Khanpur-Deh village at the northern bank
of Dhadhar River has been identified as site for the proposed Power Project.

The site has road as well as railway network connectivity. The equipment may
be transported by road or railway route to the plant.

Government of Gujarat has given "in principal approval to the project and
consent on facilitating land, water and other infrastructure facilities for the said
project.

2.8.6 Manpower

The proposed power plant will require skilled and semi-skilled personnel during
operation, maintenance and administration. The total semi skilled and unskilled
manpower of power plant during operational period is estimated to be about 250
persons. People from neighbouring villages, if found suitable, shall be employed
during construction and operational phases.

2.8.7 Township

The critical staff for operation and maintenance needs to be available on quick
basis for any requirement and therefore needs to stay in the proximity of the
plant and therefore needs to be provided with residential accommodation in the
township of the station. It is therefore, proposed to build residential quarters for
permanent employees. The township will include the residential quarters, one
project hostel, guest house, recreation facilities, health centre, shopping facilities,
open air theatre, bank, and post office.

Chapter-2
Project Description


FIGURE-2.5
GAS SUPPLY PIPELINE ROUTE
Chapter-2
Project Description

2.8.8 Health and Sanitation

To ensure optimum hygienic conditions in the plant area, proper drainage
network will be provided to avoid water logging and outflow. Adequate health
related measures and a well equipped safety and environment protection
measures will be provided to ensure clean and healthy environment.

2.8.9 Infrastructure Facilities for Labour Force
During construction phase of the project, work force needs to be deployed,
consisting of skilled and unskilled workers and would be around 500 in strength.
All the workers will be housed in labour colony, which will be located near the
project site. The colony which will be temporary in nature will have the following
amenities:

Drinking water facility;
Sanitation facilities will be constructed which will include the adequate number
of separate toilets for men and women. The make shift treatment plant will be
installed and treated wastewater will be utilized in greenbelt development;
Bins will be installed to collect municipal waste from the colony; and
Fuel (kerosene/LPG) will be supplied by the contractor to the labours for
cooking to prevent tree felling.

2.8.10 Construction Facilities - General

Adequate construction facilities shall be created so as to ensure timely and un-
hindered implementation of this combined cycle power project. The plant layout
shall be prepared in such a manner that adequate space will be available for
contractors' offices, covered and uncovered storages, fabrication and pre-
assembly yard etc. required for the project.

Construction Buildings

Separate construction office, covered storage sheds etc shall also be erected
during construction of the proposed unit. Space provision will be kept for putting
up temporary barracks / housing for the Contractors' workmen.

Construction Water

Construction water shall be tapped from water supply of the area after getting
necessary permissions

Construction Power

The construction power shall be made available from the state grid after seeking
necessary permissions.

Construction Equipments

Number of construction equipments such as Bulldozers, Road-rollers, Tyre-
mounted mobile Cranes, Tractor-Trailors, Diesel Generators, Miscellaneous tools,
survey instruments etc. shall be brought by the respective Contractors.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3
Baseline Environment Status

3.0 BASELINE ENVIRONMENT STATUS

3.1 Introduction

This chapter illustrates the description of the existing environment status of the
study area with reference to the prominent environment attributes. The study
area covers 10 km distance area around the project boundary.

The existing environment setting is considered to adjudge the baseline
environment conditions, which are described with respect to geology,
hydrogeology, climate, atmospheric conditions, water quality, soil quality,
vegetation pattern, ecology, land use and socioeconomic profiles of people.

This report incorporates the baseline data monitored for three months from 1
st

March 2010 to 31
st
May 2010 covering Premonsoon season. The methodology of
sampling and analysis is given in Annexure-III. Secondary data was collected
from various Government and Semi-Government organizations.

3.2 Profile of Barcuh

Bharuch is today is a large seaport city of more than a million inhabitants and a
municipality in the Bharuch district, in the state of Gujarat, India. As a trading
depot, the limitations of coastal shipping made it a regular terminus via several
mixed trade routes of the fabled spice and silk trading between East and West, so
that it became known to history by various names such as Bharakuccha, Bhrigu
Kaksha (the domain of Bhrigu, an ancient Indian sage), Bhroach, as well as
Bhrauch. During the British Raj it was officially known as Broach.

Bharuch is located at 21.42 N 7258 E /21.7
0
N 72.97
0
E. It has an average
elevation of 15 metres (49 feet) above mean sea level.

Bharuch has always been prosperous because of its location on the Narmada
River. Although water tends to be scarce in Gujarat, one never finds difficulty in
getting water in Bharuch. As a result of this, agriculture and other linked
commercial activities have flourished in Bharuch.

Traditionally, Bharuch has been the center of the peanut processing and
marketing industry with a well established brand name around the country.
Bharuch is also the home of the Bandhni method of clothing design and is well
known for this traditional art form.

Modern Bharuch is one of the most heavily industrialized areas, not only in
Gujarat but in India as a whole, with many large chemical plants producing
fertilizers, paints, dyes, cotton, textiles, and dairy products. Bharuch has also
advantage of Gujarat's biggest Liquid cargo terminal A very large fertilizers,
chemicals co. like, GNFC Ltd. is also located in Narmadanagar (a suburb of
Bharuch) since 1976.

Large multinationals like the Guardian Corporation, Videocon, China Light and
Power, BASF, Reliance, Tata Group, Aditya Birla group, Welspun Stahl, Aventis,
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Wockhardt, Rallis, Pfizer, Ciba, L&T, Bayer, Glenmark, UPL, Lupin, J B Chemicals,
Gujarat Fluorochemicals, NTPC, ONGC, GAIL, and GPEC have set up
manufacturing units in and around Bharuch and Ankleshwar.

Petronet LNG Ltd, one of the fastest growing companies in the Indian energy
sector, has set up the country's first LNG receiving and regasification terminal at
Dahej

As of 2001 India census, Bharuch had a population of 148,391. Males constitute
52% of the population and females 48%. Bharuch has an average literacy rate of
78%, higher than the national average of 59.5%; with male literacy of 82% and
female literacy of 73%. 10% of the population is under 6 years of age.

3.3 Geology and Hydrogeology

Gujarat state is situated between 20
0
1 and 24
0
7 N latitude and 68
0
4 70
0
E
longitude, occupying an area of about 1,96,024 sq.km. It is bounded by
Rajasthan on the northeast, by Madhya Pradesh on the east and by Maharashtra
on the south. The general configuration of the surface is virtually the same as in
whole of peninsular India. On the basis of height above sea level, the slope and
ruggedness of relief, the entire area of Gujarat can be divided into following four
physiographic units:

Kutch Peninsula;
Saurashtra Peninsula;
The Hilly terrain; and
Arid and semiarid plains.

3.4 Land Use Studies & Satellite Imagery

The main objective of this section is to provide a environmental baseline status of
the study area covering 10 km radius around the proposed project site so that
temporal changes due to the proposed industrial activities on the surroundings
can be assessed.

3.4.1 Objectives

The objectives of land use studies are:

To determine the present land use pattern;
To ascertain the temporal changes in land use pattern due to construction and
operation phase; and
To scrutinize the impacts on land use due to proposed project in the study
area.

3.4.2 Methodology

The land use of the study area is studied by analyzing the available secondary data
like census records, agricultural census and land records for the year 2001.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.4.3 Land Use Based on Census Data 2001

The study area theoretically covers an area of 37051.41 ha within the circle
encompassed by 10 km radius around the site. For computation of the land use
pattern in the study area, the village-wise land-use data given in the census
records has been taken into consideration. The geographical area of all settlements
covered within the study area is considered. Some villages in the peripheries of the
circular study area were getting partially covered and as perfect delineation and
quantification of land uses for the partially covered parts of villages of the study
area is not possible, therefore the entire village area is considered for the study,
irrespective of its coverage within the study area circle.

The land use is classified into four types - viz. forests, area under cultivation,
culturable waste and the area not available for cultivation. The land under
cultivation is further subdivided into two types viz. irrigated and unirrigated. The
landuse pattern of the study area based on 2001 census is given in Table-3.4.1.
Detailed village wise land use data is presented in Annexure-IV.

TABLE-3.4.1
LANDUSE PATTERN IN THE 10 KM STUDY AREA- 2001 CENSUS (in ha)

Sr. No. Particulars of
Land use
0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10km %
1 Forest Land 5.88 7.24 0.00 13.12
0.04
Land under Cultivation
a) Irrigated
Land
101.60 47.48 568.82 717.90 1.94
2
b) Un irrigated
Land
2047.09 4703.91 16933.05 23684.05 63.92
3 Cultivable
Waste Land
103.53 377.57 1677.88 2158.98 5.83
4 Area not
available for
cultivation
1753.20 4496.92 4227.24 10477.36 28.28
Total Area 4011.30 9633.12 23406.99 37051.41 100.00
Source: District Primary Census Hand Book - Surat District, 2001

3.4.3.1 Forests

Forest land under revenue department occupies about 13.12 ha, which works out
to about 0.04 % of the total 10 km general study area around the plant.

3.4.3.2 Land under Cultivation

Altogether 24401.95 ha land (irrigated and unirrigated) is used for cultivation,
which works out to about 66 % of the land in the general study area. The irrigated
land is only 717.90 ha and works out to be about 1.94% of the study area. The un-
irrigated land admeasures about 23684.05 ha and works out to about 63.92% of
the total study area.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.4.3.3 Cultivable Waste

Cultivable waste category of land includes the land which was cultivated
sometime back and left vacant during the past 5 years in succession. These lands
may either be fallows or covered with shrubs, which are not put to any use. The
study area comprises of 2158.98 ha cultivable wastelands, which works out to
about 5.83% of the total area. This percentage of land in this category indicates
that almost all the cultivable lands are used for cultivation as well as various
other purposes, while leaving a very less extent of land uncultivated.

3.4.3.4 Land not available for Cultivation

All the lands not included in the above classified categories of land uses are
considered in the category of land not available for cultivation. This category of
land use mainly consists of the hilly and barren lands, human settlements, roads,
water-bodies, etc. About 10477.36 ha area working out to about 28.28% of the
total study area falls in this category.

3.4.4 Land Use Pattern based on Remote Sensing Data

Remote sensing satellite imageries were collected and interpreted for the 10 km
radius study area for analyzing the land use pattern of the study area. Based on
the satellite data, land use/ land cover maps have been prepared.

3.4.4.1Land use/Land Cover Classification System

The present land use / land cover maps were prepared based on the classification
system of National standards. For explanation of each of the land use category,
the details as given in Table-3.4.2 were considered.

TABLE-3.4.2
LAND USE/LAND COVER CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Sr. No. Level-1 Level-2
Town/cities
Villages
Institution/Industry/Godown etc
1 Built-up Land
Plotted Area/Layout
Crop Land
Plantations
2 Agriculture Land
Fallow
Evergreen/Semi evergreen
Deciduous
3 Forest
Forest Plantation
Rocky/Stony Waste
Land with /without scrubs
4 Wastelands
Saline/sandy & Marshy/swampy
River/Stream 5 Water Bodies
Lake/Reservoir/Tanks
Orchard/Other Plantation
Shifting cultivation
Salt Pans, Snow covered/Glacial
6 Others
Barren/Vacant Land
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.4.4.2 Data Requirements

IRS-P6 Geo-Coded FCC on LISS-III was acquired for 3
rd
October 2009 and was
used for the mapping and interpretation. Besides, other collateral data as
available in the form of maps, charts, census records, other reports and especially
topographical survey of India maps are used. In addition to this, ground truth
survey was also conducted to verify and confirm the ground features.

3.4.4.3 Methodology

The methodology adopted for preparation of land use/ land cover thematic map is
monoscopic visual interpretation of geocoded scenes of IRS-P6 satellite LISS-III
and colour cartographic map will be developed based on field observations. The
various steps involved in the study are preparatory field work, field survey and
post field work.

3.4.4.4 Pre-field Interpretation of Satellite Data

The False Color Composite (FCC) of IRS-P6 satellite data has been used for
prefield interpretation work. Taking the help of toposheets, geology,
geomorphology and by using the image elements the features are identified and
delineated the boundaries roughly. Each feature is identified on image by their
image elements like tone, texture, colour, shape, size, pattern and association. A
tentative legend in terms of land cover and land use, physiography and erosion
was formulated. The sample areas for field check are selected covering all the
physiographic, land use/land cover feature cum image characteristics.

Ground Truth Collection

Both toposheets and imagery were taken for field verification and a transverse
plan using existing road network was made to cover as many representative
sample areas as possible to observe the broad land use features and to adjust the
sample areas according to field conditions. Detailed field observations and
investigations were carried out and the land use features are noted on the
imagery.

Post Field Work

The base maps of the study area were prepared, with the help of Survey of India
toposheets. Preliminary interpreted land use and the land cover features
boundaries from IRS-P6 False Colour Composite were modified in light of field
information and the final thematic details were transferred onto the base maps.
The final interpreted and classified thematic map was cartographed. The
cartographic map was colored with standard colour coding and detailed
description of feature with standard symbols. All the classes noted and marked by
the standard legend on the map.

3.4.4.5 Final Output

The final output would be the land use/land cover map numerals which were
given different colour code for each category as shown in map. Area estimation
of all features of Land use/Land cover categories was noted.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.4.1
THEMATIC MAP OF STUDY AREA (IRS-P6:LISS3)
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.4.2
LAND USE PATTERN BASED ON SATELLITE DATA
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.4.4.6 Observations

The following are the main interpreted land use/land cover classes of the study
area and their respective extent are given in hectares in Table-3.4.3 as on date
of satellite imagery. The thematic map and land use pattern within 10 km radius
based on IRS-P6 for 3
rd
October 2009 are shown in Figure-3.4.1 and 3.4.2
respectively.

TABLE-3.4.3
LANDUSE BREAKUP BASED ON IRS-P6 DATA - 3
RD
OCTOBER 2009

Category Land Use Area
(Hectares)
Percentage
(%)
Settlements 804 1.77 Built-up
Land Industry/Institutional Area 813 1.79
Plantation 106 0.23
Double Crop/Irrigated Area 3900 8.58 Agricltural
Land Other Agriculture Area 22738 50.00
Land with Scrub 9587 21.08
Waste Land Land without Scrub 2885 6.34
Water Body Stream/River/Tank/ Reservoir 2253 4.95
Salt Pans 1316 2.89
Others Marshy/swampy Area 1075 2.36
Total 45478 100.00
Source: IRS-P6:LISS3 data, 3
rd
October 2009

3.5 Climatology and Meteorology

The meteorological data helps for appropriate interpretation of the baseline status
of the study area as well as for input into prediction models to evaluate air quality
dispersion. Chronological data on meteorological parameters also plays an
important role in identifying the general meteorological regime of the region. The
year may broadly be divided into four seasons:

Winter season : December to February
Premonsoon season : March to May
Monsoon season : June to September
Postmonsoon season : October to November

3.5.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the
standard norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS: 8829) and India
Meteorological Department (IMD). Automatic meteorological station has been
installed near to the proposed power plant. The parameters recorded along with
frequency of recording are given in Table-3.5.1.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.5.1
METEOROLOGICAL PARAMETERS AND MONITORING FREQUENCY

Parameters Frequency Remark Detection
Limit
Wind speed Hourly Automatic sensor records Maximum,
minimum and average value.
0.02 m/s
Wind direction Hourly Automatic sensor records Maximum,
3 degrees
Temperature Hourly Automatic sensor records Maximum,
+/- 2 C
Relative Humidity Daily twice Recorded manually everyday at 08.30 and
17.30 hours
+/- 3%
Atmospheric
Pressure
Daily twice Recorded manually everyday at 08.30 and
17.30 hours
0.1 mm Hg
Rainfall Daily Recorded manually everyday at 08.30 hours 0.2 mm

3.5.1.1 Methodology of Data Generation

The Central Monitoring Station (CMS) equipped with monitoring equipment to
record hourly wind speed, direction and temperature was set up at the project
site. Data on cloud cover and storms is recorded by visual observation. Rainfall is
monitored daily by rain gauge. This CMS was in operation from 1
st
March 2010 to
31
st
May 2010 covering premonsoon season.

3.5.1.2 Sources of Information

Secondary meteorological data was collected from the nearest IMD station
located at Surat. Chronological data for the past 10 years has been collected and
analyzed to interpret the historical meteorological conditions prevailing in the
territory.
India Meteorological Department - IMD-Surat

India Meteorological Department has been monitoring surface observations such
as atmospheric pressure, temperature, relative humidity, rainfall, wind speed and
direction twice a day viz., at 0830 and 1730 hrs. The data for the above-specified
parameters has been collected for ten years and processed. Data on cloud cover
is compiled from the climatological tables of the IMD station at Surat.

3.5.2 Synthesis of Data on Climatic Conditions

3.5.2.1 Analysis of the Data Recorded at IMD-Surat

1) Temperature

The winter season starts from December and continues till the end of February.
January is the coldest month, the mean daily maximum temperature is 31.9C with
the mean daily minimum temperature at 17.1C. Both the day and night
temperatures increase rapidly during the onset of premonsoon season from March
to May. During premonsoon season the mean maximum temperature (May) is
observed at 37.2C with the mean minimum temperature at 21.9C. The mean
maximum temperature in the monsoon season was observed to be 33.7C during
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

June whereas the mean minimum temperature was observed to be 23.2C during
September. By the end of September with the onset of postmonsoon, day
temperatures decrease slightly with the mean maximum temperature at 32.2C.
The monthly variations of temperatures are presented in Table-3.5.2.

2) Relative Humidity

The air is generally dry in the region especially during premonsoon when the
average relative humidity is observed around 32.8% to 71.3%. In the monsoon
period, the relative humidity ranges between 70.1% and 86.6%. During the
postmonsoon season the mean humidity is observed between 44.8% and 76.7%.
During winter season the mean humidity is observed ranging from 34.1% to
68.0%. The monthly mean variations in relative humidity are presented in Table-
3.5.2.

3) Rainfall

The average annual rainfall based on the IMD data is 1288.8 mm. The southwest
monsoon generally sets in during the first week of June. About 75% of the rainfall
is received during the southwest monsoon. The rainfall gradually decreases after
September. The maximum number of rainy days is observed in the month of June.
Annual and monthly variations are presented in Table-3.5.2.

4) Special Weather Phenomena

Thunderstorms are frequent in premonsoon months. Occasional squalls occur in
association with thunderstorms in the later part of premonsoon season and onset
of monsoon season.
TABLE-3.5.2
CLIMATOLOGICAL DATA STATION: IMD, SURAT

Temperature (
0
C) Relative Humidity (%) Month
Max Min 08:30 hr 17:30 hr
Rainfall (mm)
January 30.1 17.1 67.4 39.2 6.4
February 31.9 18.8 65.1 34.1 9.3
March 34.6 21.9 62.3 32.8 5.3
April 36.5 24.3 68.0 42.5 15
May 37.2 25.9 71.3 60.5 45.8
June 33.7 24.4 79.1 70.3 307.1
July 31.0 23.8 84.2 78.1 339
August 30.2 23.3 86.6 79.3 269.3
September 31.5 23.2 84.4 70.1 154.5
October 32.2 21.8 76.7 55.3 95.1
November 31.8 19.7 66.9 44.8 23.7
December 30.7 17.3 68.0 43.3 18.3
Total 17.1-37.2 32.8-86.6 1288.8

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

5) Wind Speed/Direction

Generally, light to moderate winds prevail throughout the year. Winds were light
and moderate particularly during the morning hours, while during the afternoon
hours the winds were stronger. The wind roses for the study period representing
winter, pre-monsoon, monsoon and post-monsoon seasons along with annual wind
rose are shown in Figure-3.5.1 to Figure-3.5.5 and presented in Table-3.5.3.

TABLE-3.5.3
SUMMARY OF WIND PATTERN - IMD SURAT

First predominant winds Second predominant winds % Calm
Condition
Season
0830 1730 0830 1730 0830 1730
Predominant
Wind Speed
(KMPH)
Pre-Monsoon SW (28.0%) SW (36.0%) NW (12.3%) NW (20.3 %) 9.0 2.3 1 - 11
Monsoon SW (44.8%) SW (66%) W (16.5%) W (10%) 8.2 2.5 1 - 11
Post Monsoon SE (20.0%) NW (24.5%) NE (19.5%) SW (11.5%) 8.5 8.5 1 - 11
Winter NE (25.3%) NW (39.0%) N (20.4%) N (13.3%) 7.6 3.3 1 - 11
Annual SW (19.2%) SW (30.7%) NE (13.1%) NW (22.0%) 8.3 4.2 1 - 11
Note: Figures in parenthesis indicates % of time wind blows
Source: India Meteorological Department, Pune

3.5.2.1 Observations on Primary Data

Meteorological Data Generated at Site

The meteorological parameters have been recorded and are presented in Table-
3.5.4.

TABLE-3.5.4
SUMMARY OF THE METEOROLOGICAL DATA MONITORED AT SITE

Temperature
(
0
C)
Relative Humidity (%) Month
Max Min Max Min
Rainfall
(mm)
March 2010 35.1 22.5 56.4 25.1 2.3
April 2010 37.5 25.4 65.7 43.8 6.4
May 2010 38.4 27.1 67.7 52.3 17.2
Total 22.5-38.4 25.1-67.7 25.9

1] Temperature

Maximum temperature of 38.4
o
C and minimum temperature of 22.5
0
C was
recorded during the study period. Maximum temperature was observed during
May and the minimum temperature was observed during March of the study
period.
2] Relative Humidity

During the period of observation, the relative humidity recorded ranged from 25.1% to
67.7%. Maximum humidity was observed during the month of May.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3] Rainfall

Total rainfall observed during the study period was 25.9 mm.

4] Cloud Cover

The clear skies were observed mostly during the study period.

5] Wind Speed/Direction

The wind rose for the study period representing premonsoon season is shown in
Figure-3.5.6. A review of the wind rose diagram shows that predominant winds
are mostly from SW (24.7%), followed by NW (18.3%) and S (9.0%). The winds in
other direction are W (8.8%), N (8.0%), SSW (4.3%), E (3.2%), NNE (3.0%),
NNW (2.8%), WSW (2.5%), SE (2.1%), NE (2.0%), WNW (1.7%), SSE (0.6%),
ENE (0.2%), and ESE (0.2%). The calm conditions prevailed for 8.6% of the total
time. The average wind speed during the study period ranged between 1 to 11
kmph.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.5.1
WIND ROSE -PREMONSOON SEASON (IMD-SURAT)
2
8
.
0
%

S
W

1
2
.
3
%

N
W

1
.
0
%

N
N
W
N
N
E

1
.
0
%
2
.
4
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

1
.
0
%
3
.7
%
W
S
W

9
.
6
%

S
1
.
0
%
W
N
W

7.3% W C-9.0%
E
S
E
0
.7
%
S
E

7
.
0
%
E
N
E
0
%
E 1.7%
N
E

6
.
3
%
N

8
.
0
%
08:30 Hrs
PRE MONSOON
17:30 Hrs
PRE MONSOON
SPEED CALM
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
3
6
.
0
%

S
W

2
0
.
3
%

N
W

3
.
3
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

0
%
5
.
0
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
.
3
%
6
.0
%
W
S
W

5
.
7
%

S
1
.3
%
W
N
W

13.7% W C-2.3%
E
S
E
0
% S
E

0
.
4
%
E
N
E
0
%
E 0%
N
E

0
.
7
%
N

5
.
0
%
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.5.2
WIND ROSE -MONSOON SEASON (IMD-SURAT )
4
4
.
8
%

S
W

8
.
3
%

N
W

0
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

0
%
2
.
0
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
.
5
%
3
.5
%
W
S
W

7
.
0
%

S
1
.0
%
W
N
W

16.5% W C-8.2%
E
S
E
0
%
S
E

5
.
7
%
E
N
E
0
%
E 0.5%
N
E

1
.
7
%
N

0
.
3
%
6
6
.
0
%

S
W

3
.
5
%

N
W

0
.
5
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

0
%
5
.
0
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
.
5
%
5
.6
%
W
S
W

4
.
0
%

S
0
.7
%
W
N
W

10.0% W C-2.5%
E
S
E
0
% S
E

1
.
0
%
E
N
E
0
%
E 0%
N
E

0
.
2
%
N

0
.
5
%
08:30 Hrs
MONSOON
17:30 Hrs
MONSOON
SPEED CALM
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.5.3
WIND ROSE -POST MONSOON SEASON (IMD-SURAT )
08:30 Hrs
POST MONSOON
17:30 Hrs
POST MONSOON
2
.
0
%

S
W

6
.
5
%

N
W

2
.
0
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

1
.
0
%
1
.
0
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

2
.
0
%
0
%
W
S
W

5
.
5
%

S
0
.5
%

W
N
W

4.0% W C-8.5%
E
S
E
1
.
5
%
S
E

2
0
.
0
%
E
N
E
1
.0
%
E 16.5%
N
E

1
9
.
5
%
N

8
.
5
%
1
1
.
5
%

S
W

2
4
.
5
%

N
W

2
.
0
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

0
.
5
%
1
.
5
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
%
2
.
0
%
W
S
W

3
.
0
%

S
1
.0
%
W
N
W

8.5% W C-8.5%
E
S
E

0
.
5
%
S
E

5
.
5
%
E
N
E
1
.5
%
E 10.5%
N
E

1
0
.
5
%
N

8
.
5
%
SPEED CALM
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.5.4
WIND ROSE -WINTER SEASON (IMD-SURAT)
08:30 Hrs
WINTER
17:30 Hrs
WINTER
1
.
4
%

S
W

1
0
.
6
%

N
W

2
.
7
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

4
.
7
%
0
%

S
S
W
S
S
E

0
.
7
%
0
%
W
S
W

1
.
7
%

S
0
%
W
N
W

1.7% W C-7.6%
E
S
E
1
.0
%
S
E

1
1
.
5
%
E
N
E
0
.7
%
E 10.0%
N
E

2
5
.
3
%
N

2
0
.
4
%
9
.
3
%

S
W

3
9
.
0
%

N
W

5
.
4
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

3
.
0
%
0
.
3
%

S
S
W
S
S
E

0
%
2
.0
%
W
S
W

1
.
7
%

S
0
.7
%
W
N
W

8.6% W C-3.3%
E
S
E
0
%
S
E

1
.
3
%
E
N
E
0
%
E 1.7%
N
E

1
0
.
4
%
N

1
3
.
3
%
SPEED CALM
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.5.5
ANNUAL WIND ROSE (IMD-SURAT)
08:30 Hrs
ANNUAL
17:30 Hrs
ANNUAL
1
9
.
2
%

S
W

9
.
4
%

N
W

1
.
4
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

1
.
8
%
1
.
5
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
.
9
%
1
.
7
%

W
S
W

6
.
0
%

S
0
.
5
%
W
N
W

7.3% W C-8.3%
E
S
E
0
.
8
%
S
E

1
1
.
2
%
E
N
E

0
.
4
%
E 7.1%
N
E

1
3
.
1
%
N

9
.
4
%
3
0
.
7
%

S
W

2
2
.
0
%

N
W
2
.
5
%

N
N
W

N
N
E

0
.
8
%
3
.
0
%

S
S
W

S
S
E

0
.
2
%
3
.
9
%

W
S
W

3
.
6
%

S
1
.
0
%

W
N
W

10.3% W C-4.2%
E
S
E

0
.
1
%
S
E

2
.
1
%
E
N
E

0
.
3
%
E 3.0%
N
E

5
.
3
%
N

7
.
0
%
SPEED CALM
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


C-8.6%
2
.
5
%
W
S
W

2
4
.
7
%

S
W

4
.
3
%

S
S
W

9
.
0
%

S
S
E

2
.
1
%
E 3.2%
E
N
E
0
.
2
%
N
E

2
.
0
%
N
N
E

3
.
0
%
N

8
.
0
%
2
.
8
%

N
N
W

1
8
.
3
%

N
W

1
.
7
%

W
N
W

8.8% W
S
S
E

0
.
6
%
E
S
E
0
.
2
%
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
SPEED CALM

FIGURE-3.5.6
SITE SPECIFIC WINDROSE -STUDY PERIOD
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.6 Ambient Air Quality

The prime objective of the baseline air monitoring is to evaluate the existing air
quality of the area. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to
standards of the ambient air quality during the operation of the power plant.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for
sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling. The results of
monitoring carried out during study period are presented in Annexure-V.

3.6.1 Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

3.6.1.1 Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the air quality in the study area has been assessed through a
scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network. The design of
monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the
following considerations:

Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;
Topography of the study area;
Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status;
and
Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at ten locations with
due consideration to the above mentioned points. Table-3.6.1 gives the details of
environment setting around each monitoring station and their distances with
reference to the proposed power plant. The AAQM locations are shown in Figure-
3.6.1.

TABLE - 3.6.1
DETAILS OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY MONITORING LOCATIONS

Location
Code
Location Distance
w.r.t Center
of Proposed
Power Plant
(km)
Direction
w.r.t
Center of
Proposed
Power
Plant
Meteorologi
cal setting
of the
location
Environment Setting
AAQ1 Plant site - - - Industrial area
AAQ2 West North west
of plant site
0.4 WNW Crosswind Rural/Residential area
AAQ3 Vanseta 2.2 NW Upwind Rural/Residential area
AAQ4 Kundal 2.9 NE Downwind Rural/Residential area
AAQ5 Jambusar 5.5 NNE Crosswind Commercial/ Residential
area
AAQ6 Pursa 3.1 E Crosswind Rural/Residential area
AAQ7 Machasara 2.6 SE Downwind Rural/Residential area
AAQ8 Amod 7.2 E Crosswind Rural/Residential area
AAQ9 South west of
plant site
0.9 SW Upwind Rural/Residential area
AAQ10 Denva 3.2 SSW Crosswind Rural/Residential area

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.6.1
AMBIENT AIR QUALITY SAMPLING LOCATIONS
C-8.6%
2.5%
WSW
2
4
.7
%
S
W

4
.3
%
S
S
W

9
.0
%
S
S
E
2
.1
%
E 3.2%
ENE 0.2% N
E
2
.0
%
N
N
E
3
.0
% N
8
.0
%
2
.8
%
N
N
W

1
8
.3
%
N
W

1.7%
WNW
8.8% W
S
S
E
0
.6
%
ESE 0.2%
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
SPEED CALM
JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh
Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ4 AAQ3
AAQ7
AAQ9
AAQ10
AAQ6
AAQ5
AAQ8
Air Quality Sampling Locations
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.6.2 Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out with a frequency of two days
per week at ten locations during study period. The ambient air quality parameters
along with their frequency of sampling are given in Table-3.6.2.

TABLE-3.6.2
MONITORED PARAMETERS AND FREQUENCY OF SAMPLING

Parameters Sampling Frequency
Particulate Matter-10 m 24 hourly sample twice a week for one season
Particulate Matter-2.5 m 24 hourly sample twice a week for one season
Sulphur dioxide (SO
2
) 24 hourly samples twice a week for one season
Nitorgen dioxide (NO
2
) 24 hourly samples twice a week for one season
Heavy metals 24 hourly samples twice a week for one season
Carbon monoxide (CO) Three 8 hourly samples per day, twice per week for
one season
Ozone and Oxidants Three 8 hourly samples per day, twice per week for
one season
Hydrocarbon Three 8 hourly samples per day, twice per week for
one season

3.6.3 Instruments used for Sampling

Respirable dust samplers (RDS) were used for monitoring of Particulate Matter
(PM
10
& PM
2.5
), Hg and gaseous pollutants like SO
2
, NO
2
, and O
3
. Glass tubes were
deployed for collection of grab samples of carbon monoxide. Gas Chromatography
techniques have been used for the estimation of benzene and Hydrocarbons.

3.6.4 Method of Analysis

The air samples are analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central
Pollution Control Board (CPCB), IS: 5184 and American Public Health Organization
(APHA).

3.6.5 Presentation of Results

Various statistical parameters like 98
th
percentile, average, maximum and
minimum values have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ
monitoring stations. The summary of these results for all the locations is presented
in Table-3.6.3.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.6.3
SUMMARY OF AMBIENT AIR QUALITY RESULTS

PM10 ( g/m
3
) PM2.5 ( g/m
3
) Location
Code
Location
Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%
AAQ1 Plant site 16.5 25.5 21.7 25.3 4.8 6.6 5.8 6.6
AAQ2 West North west of plant site 20.1 29.6 25.2 29.6 6.8 9.9 8.6 9.7
AAQ3 Vanseta 18.6 28.2 23.3 27.6 6.3 8.1 7.1 8.0
AAQ4 Kundal 19.5 27.9 25.4 27.8 6.2 9.6 8.7 9.6
AAQ5 Jambusar 23.6 37.3 31.0 36.9 7.3 10.1 9.2 10.0
AAQ6 Pursa 17.4 30.2 25.9 29.8 5.2 7.4 6.6 7.4
AAQ7 Machasara 17.4 25.8 22.8 25.7 5.6 7.5 6.3 7.5
AAQ8 Amod 18.4 26.1 23.2 25.6 6.7 8.3 7.5 8.3
AAQ9 South west of plant site 15.7 26.1 22.0 26.0 5.2 7.5 6.6 7.4
AAQ10 Denva 14.8 22.4 18.2 22.1 4.9 7.0 6.3 7.0
Range 14.8-37.3 4.8-10.1

Location SO2 ( g/m
3
) NO2 ( g/m
3
) CO ( g/m
3
) Location
Code
Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%
AAQ1 Plant site 5.1 7.8 6.3 7.7 6.3 9.3 7.9 9.3 210 291 267 289
AAQ2 West North west of
plant site
6.4 10.3 9.2 10.3 10.6 12.7 11.8 12.6 310 371 353 370
AAQ3 Vanseta 6.2 8.8 7.0 8.5 8.2 11.4 9.7 11.3 234 335 280 329
AAQ4 Kundal 6.1 9.2 7.9 9.0 9.4 11.8 10.8 11.8 237 365 325 361
AAQ5 Jambusar 7.8 11.1 9.3 11.0 11.2 13.7 12.5 13.6 315 372 354 372
AAQ6 Pursa 5.3 7.9 6.7 7.8 6.6 11.1 8.7 10.7 261 336 299 331
AAQ7 Machasara 4.6 6.8 5.5 6.7 7.3 9.1 8.4 9.1 228 326 286 323
AAQ8 Amod 6.3 8.9 7.9 8.9 7.6 11.5 9.4 11.3 282 357 320 352
AAQ9 South west of plant site 5.9 8.6 7.4 8.6 8.3 11.3 9.5 11.2 217 295 263 291
AAQ10 Denva 5.7 8.8 7.2 8.8 7.1 11.6 9.8 11.6 225 321 271 316
Range 4.6-11.1 6.3-13.7 210-372

Location HC ( g/m
3
) Hg (ppm) O3 ( g/m
3
) Location
Code
Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98% Min Max Avg 98%
AAQ1 Plant site <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ2 West North west of
plant site
<6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ3 Vanseta <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ4 Kundal <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ5 Jambusar <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ6 Pursa <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ7 Machasara <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ8 Amod <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ9 South west of
plant site
<6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
AAQ10 Denva <6 <6 <6 <6 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Range <6 <0.01 <0.1

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.6.5.1 Observations on Primary Data

Particulate Matter (10 m)

The maximum value 37.3 g/m
3
for PM
10
was observed at Jambusar (AAQ5). 24
hours applicable limit

for industrial, residential, rural and other areas is 100 g/m
3
.
The minimum value 14.8 g/m
3
was observed at Denva village (AAQ10).

Particulate Matter (2.5 m)

The maximum value 10.1 g/m
3
for PM
2.5
was observed at Jambusar (AAQ10). 24
hours applicable limit

for industrial, residential, rural and other areas is 60 g/m
3
.
The minimum value 4.8 g/m
3
was observed at Plant site (AAQ1).

Sulphur dioxide

The maximum values of SO
2
are observed to be 11.1 g/m
3
at Jambusar (AAQ5)
and minimum value of 4.6 g/m
3
at Pursa village (AAQ6). The 24 hours applicable
limit for industrial, residential, rural and other areas is 80 g/m
3
.

Nitorgen dioxide

The maximum values of NO
2
are observed to be 13.7 g/m
3
at Jambusar (AAQ5)
and minimum value of 6.3 g/m
3
at Plant site (AAQ1). The 24 hours applicable
limit for industrial, residential, rural and other areas is 80 g/m
3
for residential
areas.

CO

CO values were found to be well with in the prescribed standards specified by
CPCB.

Mercury

Mercury values were found to be below detectable levels.

Ozone

Ozone values were found to be below detectable levels.

3.7 Water Quality

Selected water quality parameters of ground water resources within 10 km radius
of the study area have been studied for assessing the hydrological environment to
evaluate anticipated impact of the proposed power plant. It also assists to identify
critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate mitigation measures for
implementation.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.7.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized
based on the following aspects:

Drainage pattern of the regional area;
Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact
areas; and
Areas representing the existing baseline environment.

Ten ground water samples and four surface water samples representing marine
and fresh water environment within 10 km radial distance were examined for
physicochemical, heavy metals and bacteriological parameters. The samples were
collected and analyzed as per the procedures specified in 'Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater' published by American Public Health
Association (APHA). Samples were collected taking into account all precautionary
measures applicable. The analyzed results were compared with the standards for
drinking water as per IS: 2296 Class `C (Tolerance limits for inland surface waters
subject to pollution-Drinking water source with conventional treatment followed by
disinfection) and IS: 10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the
essential and desirable characteristics required to be tested for ascertaining the
suitability of water for drinking purpose). The IS: 2296 Class `C standards are
applicable to a source of water supply for drinking, culinary and food processing
purposed after it is subjected to approved treatment such as coagulation,
sedimentation, filtration, and disinfection, with additional treatment, if necessary,
to remove naturally present impurities.

3.7.2 Water Sampling Locations

The water sampling locations are listed below in Table-3.7.1 and are shown in
Figure-3.7.1.

TABLE-3.7.1
DETAILS OF WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Location
Code
Location Dist w.r.t Center
of proposed
Power Plant
(km)
Dir w.r.t
Center of
proposed
Power Plant
Environment
Setting
Surface Water (Marine & Fresh water)
Fresh water
SW1 Dhadhar river near Magnad 5.8 ENE River water
SW2 Dhadhar river near
Machasara
1.8 SE River water
Marine water
SW3 Creek water near Denva 4.4 SW Creek water
SW4 Arabian Sea 25 SW Sea water
Ground water
GW1 Kanpur deh 0.3 NE Borewell, used for
domestic purposes
GW2 Kundal 2.9 NE Hand pump, used
for domestic
purposes
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Location
Code
Location Dist w.r.t Center
of proposed
Power Plant
(km)
Dir w.r.t
Center of
proposed
Power Plant
Environment
Setting
GW3 Mahapara 4.7 NE Hand pump, used
for domestic
purposes
GW4 Pursa 3.1 E Dug well, used for
domestic purposes
GW5 Achhod 4.6 ESE Dug well, used for
domestic purposes
GW6 Mangrol 1.9 SSE Hand pump, used
for domestic
purposes
GW7 Denva 3.2 SSW Hand pump, used
for domestic
purposes
GW8 Dolia 2.2 WNW Dug well, used for
domestic purposes
GW9 Kalak 2.2 N Hand pump, used
for domestic
purposes
GW10 Jambusar 5.5 NNE Borewell, used for
domestic purposes


Four surface water and ten ground water samples representing marine and fresh
water environment have been considered around the proposed power plant within
the periphery of 10 km taking in to account the various uses. The results of
surface water samples and the ground water quality are presented in Table-
3.7.2.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.7.1
WATER SAMPLING LOCATIONS
JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
GW1
GW2
GW9
GW8
GW5
GW6
GW7
GW4
GW10
Ground Water Locations
Surface Water Locations
GW3
SW1
SW2
SW3
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.7.2 (A)
DETAILS OF SURFACE WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS IN STUDY AREA

Sr.
No.
Parameter Unit Class C of
IS: 2296
Tolerance
Limit
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
1 pH - 6.5 to 8.5 7.6 7.7 8.0 8.2
2 Colour Hazen units 300 12 10 14 12
3 Temperature
o
C $ 26.3 26.8 27.2 26.4
4 Conductivity S/cm $ 464 512 58240 56720
5 Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 1500 308 348 36820 34980
6 Dissolved oxygen mg/l 4 Min. 4.2 4.1 5.8 5.9
7 Biochemical Oxygen Demand
(3 days at 27
0
C)
mg/l 3 20 18 <3 <3
8 Chemical Oxygen Demand mg/l $ 120 105 230 195
9 Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l $ 136 158 6950 6700
10 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l $ 158 174 184 162
11 Calcium as Ca mg/l $ 28.8 32.8 420 360
12 Magnesium as Mg mg/l $ 15.6 18.5 1434 1409
13 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 600 29.8 41.1 19710 18363
14 Sulphates as SO4 mg/l 400 13.7 15.7 1471 1429
15 Fluorides as F mg/l 1.5 0.6 0.7 0.6 0.4
16 Nitrates as NO3 mg/l 50 4.8 6.3 15.8 13.9
17 Sodium as Na mg/l $ 34.6 41.2 9960 9420
18 Potassium as K mg/l $ 8.2 9.6 490 420
19 Phenolic compounds as
C6H5OH
mg/l 0.005 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
20 Oil and grease mg/l 0.1 <1.0 <0.1 <1.0 <1.0
21 Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
22 Arsenic as As mg/l 0.2 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
23 Copper as Cu mg/l 1.5 0.03 0.03 0.06 0.06
24 Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.03
25 Iron as Fe mg/l 50 0.03 0.04 0.14 0.11
26 Zinc as Zn mg/l 15 0.06 0.05 0.14 0.13
27 Mercury as Hg mg/l $ <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
28 Total Coliforms MPN/ 100 ml 5000 106 102 <2 <2

TABLE-3.7.2 (B)
DETAILS OF GROUND WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS IN STUDY AREA

Parameter UOM IS:10500
Requirement
(Desirable limit)
GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5
pH - 6.5-8.5 (NR) 7.6 7.1 7.5 8.0 8.2
Colour Hazen 5 (25) 6 4 4 5 5
Taste - Agreeable Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag
Odour - U.O. (-) U.O. U.O. U.O. U.O. U.O.
Conductivity S/cm $ 8650 48500 820 277 270
Turbidity NTU 5 (10) 4 6 4 4 5
Total Dissolved
Solids
mg/l 500 (2000) 5490 30120 490 160 160
Total Hardness
(as CaCO3)
mg/l
300 (600
2550 5400 215 71.7 60.4
Total Alkalinity mg/l 200 (-) 680.0 120.0 130.0 100.0 95.0
Calcium (Ca) mg/l 75 [200] 620 240 58 15.5 14.3
Magnesium (Mg) mg/l 30 (200) 243 1166.4 17.0 8.0 6.0
Residual chlorine mg/l 0.2 Min. (-) <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2 <0.2
Boron (B) mg/l 1 (5) 0.03 0.10 0.01 0.07 0.02
Chlorides (Cl) mg/l 250 (1000) 1890.5 14220.0 170.2 20.0 19.5
Sulphates (SO4) mg/l 200 (400) 300.5 1240.5 35.5 7.2 4.3
Fluorides (F) mg/l 1.0 (1.5) 1.3 0.9 0.2 0.1 0.2
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Parameter UOM IS:10500
Requirement
(Desirable limit)
GW1 GW2 GW3 GW4 GW5
Nitrates (as NO3) mg/l 45 (NR) 57.6 57.1 1.2 0.3 0.2
Sodium (Na) mg/l $ 742.5 6980 80.1 25.8 28.2
Potassium (K) mg/l $ 40.0 150.0 20.0 5.8 5.0
Phenolic
Compounds
mg/l 0.001 (0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Cyanides (CN) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02
Anionic
detergents
mg/l

0.2 (1.0) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Mineral oil mg/l 0.01 (0.03) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.01 (NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Copper (Cu) mg/l 0.05 (1.5) 0.02 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.05 (NR) 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Manganese (Mn) mg/l 0.1 (0.3) 0.01 0.03 <0.01 <0.01 0.01
Iron (Fe) mg/l 0.3 (1.0) 0.07 0.13 0.03 0.17 0.06
Chromium(Cr
+
6) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
Selenium (Se) mg/l 0.01 (NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Zinc (Zn) mg/l 5 (15) 0.21 0.07 0.13 0.09 0.02
Aluminium (Al) mg/l 0.03 (0.2) <0.01 0.03 0.01 0.01 <0.01
Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.001 (NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Pesticides mg/l Absent (0.001) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
E. coli - Absent (-) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
Total Coliforms MPN/100 ml 10 (-) NIL NIL NIL NIL NIL
Source: Vimta Labs Limited
Note: Values in paranthesis are `Permissible limit in the absence of Alternate source.
NR: No relaxation
$: Limits not specified UO: Un-Objectionable
IS: 10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the essential and desirable characteristics
required to be tested for ascertaining the suitability of water for drinking purpose).

TABLE-3.7.2 (C)
DETAILS OF GROUND WATER QUALITY ANALYSIS IN STUDY AREA

Parameter UOM IS:10500 Requirement
(Desirable limit)
GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10
Ph - 6.5-8.5 (NR) 7.6 7.8 7.7 7.6 7.6
Colour Hazen 5 (25) 7 8 3 4 6
Taste - Agreeable Ag Ag Ag Ag Ag
Odour - U.O. (-) U.O. U.O. U.O. U.O. U.O.
Conductivity S/cm $ 5290 1420 285 1818 2900
Turbidity NTU 5 (10) 4 5 5 10 7
Total Dissolved Solids mg/l 500 (2000) 3690 920 170 1220 1930
Total Hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 300 (600 1025 325 79.5 516.6 674.3
Total Alkalinity mg/l 200 (-) 510.0 320 105.0 440 725
Calcium (Ca) mg/l 75 [200] 210 110 15.8 140 180
Magnesium (Mg) mg/l 30 (200) 121.5 12.2 9.7 40.5 54.5
Residual chlorine mg/l 0.2 Min. (-) <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1 <0.1
Boron (B) mg/l 1 (5) 0.03 0.07 0.04 0.05 0.06
Chlorides (Cl) mg/l 250 (1000) 1310.5 250.5 18.0 290.7 390.0
Sulphates (SO4) mg/l 200 (400) 123.9 13.6 5.9 62.8 107.1
Fluorides (F) mg/l 1.0 (1.5) 0.5 1.6 0.2 0.4 0.4
Nitrates (as NO3) mg/l 45 (NR) 57.2 10.2 0.6 5.2 56.8
Sodium (Na) mg/l $ 694.0 162.2 26.5 150.5 320.5
Potassium (K) mg/l $ 30.2 18.0 5.7 26.5 30.1
Phenolic Compounds mg/l 0.001 (0.002) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Cyanides (CN) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02 <0.02
Anionic detergents mg/l 0.2 (1.0) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Mineral oil mg/l 0.01 (0.03) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.01 (NR) <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Copper (Cu) mg/l 0.05 (1.5) 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.05 (NR) 0.01 <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.01
Manganese (Mn) mg/l 0.1 (0.3) 0.02 <0.01 0.01 <0.01 <0.01
Iron (Fe) mg/l 0.3 (1.0) 0.09 0.02 0.35 0.02 0.62
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Parameter UOM IS:10500 Requirement
(Desirable limit)
GW6 GW7 GW8 GW9 GW10
Chromium(Cr
+
6) mg/l 0.05 (NR) <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05
Selenium (Se) mg/l 0.01 (NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Zinc (Zn) mg/l 5 (15) 0.03 0.10 0.04 0.06 0.04
Aluminium (Al) mg/l 0.03 (0.2) 0.01 <0.01 0.02 <0.01 0.02
Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.001 (NR) <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 <0.001
Pesticides mg/l Absent (0.001) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
E. coli - Absent (-) Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent
Total Coliforms MPN/
100
ml
10 (-) Nil Nil Nil Nil Nil
Source: Vimta Labs Limited
Note: Values in paranthesis are `Permissible limit in the absence of Alternate source.
NR: No relaxation
$: Limits not specified UO: Un-Objectionable
IS: 10500 (the standard prescribes the requirements for the essential and desirable characteristics
required to be tested for ascertaining the suitability of water for drinking purpose).

3.7.4 Observations

3.7.4.1 Surface water quality

Fresh water quality

The analysis results indicate the pH of 7.6 and 7.7 and is observed to be within
the tolerance limit of 6.5 to 8.5.

The total hardness reported is 136 and 158 mg/l. The iron concentration is found
to be 0.03 and 0.04 mg/l and is observed to be within the tolerance limit of 50
mg/l.

The chlorides concentration reported is 29.8 and 41.1 mg/l, and is observed to be
within the tolerance limit of 600 mg/l for both the locations.

The fluoride concentration reported is 0.6 and 0.7 mg/l, and is observed to be
within the tolerance limit of 1.5 mg/l.

The TDS reported is 308 and 348 mg/l, and is observed to be within the tolerance
limit of 1500 mg/l.

The calcium concentration reported is 28.8 and 32.8 mg/l. The magnesium
concentration is in the range of 15.6 to 18.5 mg/l.

The copper concentration reported is 0.03 mg/l, and is observed to be within the
tolerance limit of 1.5 mg/l.

The sulphate concentration reported is 13.7 and 15.7 mg/l, and is observed to be
within the tolerance limit of 400 mg/l.

The nitrate concentration reported is 4.8 and 6.3 mg/l, and is observed to be
within the limit of 50 mg/l.

The phenolic compounds reported is less than 0.001 mg/l, and are within the limit
of 0.005 mg/l.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The Mercury concentration reported is less than 0.001 mg/l.

The Cadmium concentration reported is less than 0.01 mg/l.

The Arsenic concentration reported is less than 0.01 mg/l, and is within the limit
of 0.2 mg/l.

The Lead concentration reported is 0.01 and 0.02 mg/l and is within the limit of
0. 1 mg/l.

The Zinc concentration reported is 0.05 and 0.06 mg/l and is within the limit of
15 mg/l.

The total alkalinity concentration reported is 158 and 174 mg/l.

Marine water quality

The analysis results indicate the pH of 8.0 and 8.2.

The total hardness reported is 6700 and 6950 mg/l. The iron concentration is
found to be 0.11 and 0.14 mg/l.

The chlorides concentration reported is 18363 and 19710 mg/l.

The fluoride concentration reported is 0.4 and 0.6 mg/l.

The TDS reported is 34980 and 36820 mg/l.

The calcium concentration reported is 360 and 420 mg/l. The magnesium
concentration is in the range of 1409 to 1434 mg/l.

The copper concentration reported is 0.06 mg/l.

The sulphate concentration reported is 1429 and 1471 mg/l.

The nitrate concentration reported is 13.9 and 15.8 mg/l.

The phenolic compounds reported is less than 0.001 mg/l.

The Mercury concentration reported is less than 0.001 mg/l.

The Cadmium concentration reported is less than 0.01 mg/l.

The Arsenic concentration reported is less than 0.01 mg/l, and is within the limit
of 0.2 mg/l.

The Lead concentration reported is 0.03 mg/l.

The Zinc concentration reported is 0.13 and 0.14 mg/l.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The total alkalinity concentration reported is 162 and 184 mg/l.

3.7.4.2 Ground water quality

Essential Characteristics

The analysis results indicate the pH range of 7.1 to 8.2 and is observed to be
within the desirable limit of 6.5 to 8.5.

The total hardness is in the range of 60.4 to 5400 mg/l and is observed to be
within the desirable limit of 300 mg/l at four locations.

The iron concentration is found to be in the range of 0.02 to 0.62 mg/l and is
observed to be within the desirable limit of 0.3 mg/l at eight locations.

The chlorides concentration is in the range of 18 to 14220 mg/l, and is observed
to be within the desirable limit of 250 mg/l for four locations.

The fluoride concentration is in the range of 0.1 to 1.6 mg/l, and is observed to
be within the desirable limit of 1.0 mg/l at eight locations.

Desirable Characteristics

The Total Dissolved Solids are in the range of 160 to 30120 mg/l, and is observed
to be within the desirable limit of 500 mg/l for four locations.

The calcium concentration is in the range of 14.3 to 620 mg/l and is observed to
be within the desirable limit of 75 mg/l for four locations. The magnesium
concentration is in the range of 6 to 1166.4 mg/l, and is observed to be within
the desirable limit of 30 mg/l for five locations.

The copper concentration is in the range of less than 0.01 mg/l to 0.02 mg/l and
is observed to be within the desirable limit of 0.05 mg/l.

The sulphate concentration is in the range of 4.3 to 1240.5 mg/l, and is observed
to be within the desirable limit of 200 mg/l for eight locations.

The nitrate concentration is in the range of 0.2 to 57.6 mg/l, and is observed to
be within the limit of 45 mg/l for six locations.

The phenolic compounds are less than 0.001 mg/l in all the locations, and are
within the desirable limit of 0.001 mg/l.

The Mercury concentration is less than 0.001 mg/l in all the locations, and is
within the limit of 0.001 mg/l.

The Cadmium concentration is less than 0.01 mg/l in all the locations and is
within the limit of 0.01 mg/l.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The Selenium and Arsenic concentrations are less than 0.001 mg/l in all the
locations, and are within the limit of 0.001 mg/l.

The Cyanide concentration is less than 0.02 mg/l at all the locations. The Lead
concentration is in the range of less than 0.01 to 0.01 mg/l and is within the limit
of 0.05 mg/l.

The Zinc concentration is in the range of 0.02 to 0.21 mg/l and is within the
desirable limit of 5 mg/l.

The anionic detergents concentration is less than 0.01 mg/l at all locations and is

The Chromium concentration is less than 0.05 mg/l at all locations and is within
the limit of 0.05 mg/l.

The mineral oil concentration is less than 0.01 mg/l at all locations and is within
the limit of 0.01 mg/l.

The pesticides are absent at all locations and is complying with the standard of
their complete absent.

The total alkalinity concentration is in the range of 95 to 725 mg/l and is within
the limit of 200 mg/l at five locations.

The aluminium concentration is in the range of less than 0.01 to 0.03 mg/l and is

The boron concentration is in the range of 0.01 to 0.1 mg/l and is within the
desirable limit of 0.1 mg/l.

Saline water ingress at most of the locations influences the water quality.

3.8 Soil Characteristics

It is essential to identify the impacts in the study area on the soil characteristics,
which would affect the agricultural, and afforestation potential. Accordingly, an
assessment of the baseline soil quality has been carried out.

3.8.1 Data Generation

For studying soil quality of the region, sampling locations were selected
representing various land use conditions and samples were collected to assess the
existing soil conditions in and around the project area. The physical, chemical
parameters and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The samples were
collected by ramming a core cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm. The
present study on the soil quality establishes the baseline characteristics and
identifies the incremental concentrations if any, due to the proposed project. The
sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;
To determine the impact of proposed activity on soil characteristics; and
To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural
productivity point of view.

Ten locations within 10 km radius around the project site were selected for soil
sampling. The details of the sampling locations are given in Table-3.8.1 and are
depicted in Figure-3.8.1. The soil samples have been analyzed for physico-
chemical parameters and heavy metals in accordance with the USEPA and Soil
Science Society of America (SSSA) standard test methods. The analysis results of
all the locations are presented in Table-3.8.2. The results are compared with
standard classification given in Table-3.8.3.

TABLE-3.8.1
DETAILS OF SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Location
Code
Location Dist. w.r.t Center of
Proposed Power Plant (km)
Dir. w.r.t
Center of Proposed
Power Plant
S1 Plant site - -
S2 Kundal 2.9 NE
S3 Mahapara 4.7 NE
S4 Pursa 3.1 E
S5 Achhod 4.6 ESE
S6 Mangrol 1.9 SSE
S7 Denva 3.2 SSW
S8 Dolia 2.2 NNW
S9 Kalak 2.2 N
S10 Jambusar 5.5 NNE

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.8.1
SOIL SAMPLING LOCATIONS
JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
S1
S2
S9
S8
S5
S6
S7
S4
S10
S3
Soil Sampling Locations
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.8.2
SOIL ANALYSIS RESULTS

Parameters Unit S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10
pH (1:5) - 8.6 8.5 7.5 8.4 8.5 7.5 8.4 8.3 8.1 7.5
Electrical
Conductivity
mho/cm 189 163 137 154 169 179 242 170 225 168
Texture % Silty
Clay
Silty
Clay
Loam
Silty
Clay
Silty
Clay
Loam
Silty
Clay
Silty
Clay
Silty
Clay
Silty
Clay
Clay Sandy
Clay
Sand % 19 18 20 21 19 20 19 18 25 48
Silt % 40 50 38 39 40 38 37 40 20 13
Clay % 41 32 42 40 41 42 44 42 55 39
Bulk Density g/cc 1.1 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0
Exchangeable
Calcium as Ca
mg/ Kg 5058 3798 1589 3038 4212 4647 4783 4078 4221 4199
Exchangeable
Magnesium as Mg
mg/ Kg 858 729 943 704 995 957 756 874 677 1069
Exchangeable
Sodium as Na
mg/ Kg 523.0 492.3 408.8 327.3 253.5 435.7 459.8 382.3 484.3 278.9
Available Potassium
as K
Kg/ha 856.6 940.7 752.1 728.5 595.4 826.8 970.9 915.6 893.7 616.0
Available
Phosphorous as PO4
Kg/ha 58.1 75.1 46.0 59.1 35.2 68.3 68.4 66.6 53.1 55.4
Available Nitrogen
as N
Kg/ha 65.8 90.0 71.1 79.1 67.5 58.3 39.0 96.6 142.1 65.5
Organic Matter % 0.62 0.77 0.67 0.74 0.70 0.55 0.34 0.83 1.33 0.68
Organic Carbon % 0.36 0.45 0.39 0.43 0.40 0.32 0.19 0.48 0.77 0.39
Chloride as Cl mg/ Kg 88.6 85.0 124.0 88.5 106.3 70.9 106.3 70.9 106.3 53.1
Sulphate as SO4 mg/ Kg 30.6 25.2 33.5 17.1 23.2 24.8 41.3 27.7 28.4 23.5
Sodium Adsorption
Ratio (SAR)
- 0.81 0.86 0.93 0.62 0.41 0.69 0.74 0.63 0.82 0.44
Aluminium % 2.5 2.5 1.8 1.3 5.1 2.8 4.8 6.5 3.4 3.7
Total Iron % 4.1 3.4 2.3 1.8 7.3 4.0 7.2 8.9 5.4 4.4
Manganese mg/Kg 925 485 520 403 1450 625 1555 1060 780 620
Boron mg/Kg 44.4 45.9 46.2 38.8 75.3 46.2 62.5 78.0 51.5 36.5
Zinc as Zn mg/kg 73.5 66.5 51.7 47.5 113.9 74.8 103.6 119.5 88.2 76.1

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.8.3
STANDARD SOIL CLASSIFICATION

Sr.
No.
Soil Test Classification
1 pH <4.5 Extremely acidic
4.51- 5.00 Very strongly acidic
5.51-6.00 moderately acidic
6.01-6.50 slightly acidic
6.51-7.30 Neutral
7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline
7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline
8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline
9.01 very strongly alkaline
2 Salinity Electrical Conductivity (mmhos/cm)
(1 ppm = 640 mmho/cm)
Upto 1.00 Average
1.01-2.00 harmful to germination
2.01-3.00 harmful to crops
3 Organic Carbon (%) Upto 0.2: very less
0.21-0.4: less
0.41-0.5 medium,
0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient
0.81-1.00: sufficient
>1.0 more than sufficient
4 Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Upto 50 very less
51-100 less
101-150 good
151-300 Better
>300 sufficient
5 Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Upto 15 very less
16-30 less
31-50 medium,
51-65 on an average sufficient
66-80 sufficient
>80 more than sufficient
6 Potassium (Kg/ha) 0 -120 very less
120-180 less
181-240 medium
241-300 average
301-360 better
>360 more than sufficient
Source -Hand Book of Agriculture, ICAR (Indian Council of Agricultural Research)

3.8.1.1 Baseline Soil Status

The soil analysis results are presented in Table-3.8.2. These results are
compared with the standard soil classification given in Table-3.8.3. It has been
observed that the pH of the soil ranged from 7.5-8.6 indicating that the soils are
slightly alkaline to strongly alkaline in nature. The soil in the study area is
predominantly of silty clayey type. The bulk density of the soil ranges from 1 -
1.2 g/cc. The electrical conductivity was observed to be in the range of 137 - 242
S/cm. The nitrogen values are in the range of 39 - 142.1 kg/ha indicating that
the soils have nitrogen content of very less to good. The potassium values range
between 595.4 - 970.9 kg/ha, which indicate that the soils have more than
sufficient quantity of potassium. The phosphorus values range between 35.2-75.1
kg/ha, which indicate that the soils have very less quantity of phosphorus. The
soil from the study area shows moderate fertility.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.9 Noise Level Survey

The objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to evaluate the baseline
noise and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by
proposed project.

3.9.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major
noise generating sources in the area. Noise monitoring has been carried out at
different zones of land use viz rural/residential and commercial zones in the study
area. There are no identified industrial zones in the study area. The noise
monitoring locations are given in Table-3.9.1 and shown in Figure-3.9.1.

TABLE-3.9.1
DETAILS OF NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS

Location
Code

Location Distance w.r.t
Center of Proposed
Power Plant (km)
Direction
Center of
Proposed
Power Plant
Environment Setting
N1 Plant site - - Industrial area
N2 Jambusar 5.5 NNE Commercial/ Residential
area
N3 Mahapara 4.7 NE Rural/Residential area
N4 Pursa 3.1 E Rural/Residential area
N5 Acchod 4.6 ESE Rural/Residential area
N6 Machasara 2.6 SE Rural/Residential area
N7 Roza Tankariya 5.1 SSE Rural/Residential area
N8 Denva 2.2 NNW Rural/Residential area
N9 Sardarpura 3.4 NNW Rural/Residential area
N10 Kalak 2.2 N Rural/Residential area

3.9.2 Types of Sound Fields

Free Field

Free progressive sound waves have been described as sound waves that propagate
without obstruction from source to the receiver. In the case of spherical waves, the
inverse square law holds good so that the sound pressure level decreases by 6
dB(A) when the distance is doubled. Such a field is known as free field.

Near Field

The near field is defined as that region close to the source where the inverse
square law does not apply. Usually, this region is located within a few wavelengths
of the source and also controlled by the dimension of the source.

Far Field

The far field consists of two parts, the free part and the reverberation part. In the
free part of the far field, the sound pressure level obeys the inverse square law.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.9.1
NOISE MONITORING LOCATIONS
JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
N1
N10
N9
N5
N6
N8
N4
N2
N3
Noise Sampling Locations
N7
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The reverberant part of the field exists for enclosed situation where the reflected
sound waves are superimposed on the incident sound waves. If there are many
reflected waves from all possible direction, a diffuse sound field exists.

3.9.3 Instrument Used for Monitoring

Noise levels were measured using sound level meter manufactured by Quest
Technologies, USA (Model No.2900). The sound level-integrating meter is an
integrating/ logging with Octave filter attachment (model OB-100) with frequency
range of 31.5 to 16000 Hz. This instrument is capable of measuring the Sound
Pressure Level (SPL), L
eq
and octave band frequency analysis.

3.9.4 Method of Monitoring

Noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24 hours with one hour
interval. During each hour, parameters like L10, L50, L90 and Leq were directly
computed by the instrument based on the sound pressure levels. Monitoring was
carried out at a response and fast mode.

3.9.5 Parameters Measured During Monitoring

For noise levels measured over a given period of time interval, it is possible to
describe important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated
using the percent of the time certain noise levels exceed the time interval. The
notation for the statistical quantities of noise levels is described below:

L
10
is the noise level exceeded 10 percent of the time
L
50
is the noise level exceeded 50 percent of the time; and
L
90
is the noise level exceeded 90 percent of the time.

Hourly L
eq
values have been computed by the noise integrating sound level meter.

L
day
: Average noise levels between 6:00 hours to 22.00 hours.
L
night
: Average noise levels between 22:00 hours to 6.00 hours.

A rating has been developed by Environmental Protection Agency, (US-EPA) for
specification of community noise from all the sources the Day-Night Sound Level,
(L
dn
).

L
dn
: It is similar to a 24 hr equivalent sound level except that during night time
period (10 pm to 6 am) a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the instantaneous
sound level before computing the 24 hr average. This nighttime penalty is added to
account for the fact that noise during night when people usually sleep is judged as
more annoying than the same noise during the daytime.

The L
dn
for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly L
eq
's,
by the following equation:

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

)
`
+ =

= =
+
16
1
8
1
] 10 / ) 10 [( ) 10 / (
10 10
24
1
log 10
i i
i Leq i Leq
dn
L

Where, L
day
is the equivalent sound level during the daytime (6 am to 10 pm) and
L
night
is the equivalent sound level during the nighttime (10 pm to 6 am).


The statistical analysis is done for measured noise levels at ten locations in the
study area. The parameters are analyzed for L
day
, L
night
, and L
dn
. The statistical
analysis results are given in Table-3.9.2.

TABLE-3.9.2
AMBIENT NOISE LEVELS IN THE STUDY AREA [dB(A)]

Sr. No. Location L10 L50 L90 Leq Lday Lnight Ldn
1 Plant site 50.2 46.2 42.4 47.2 48.1 44.4 51.6
2 Jambusar 60.8 56.8 53.0 57.8 58.7 53.6 61.2
3 Mahapara 42.7 38.7 34.9 39.7 40.6 36.9 44.1
4 Pursa 43.6 39.8 36.0 40.8 41.8 38.1 45.3
5 Acchod 49.2 45.1 41.8 46.0 46.5 42.3 49.6
6 Machasara 41.4 37.4 33.6 38.4 39.3 35.6 42.8
7 Roza Tankariya 46.8 42.8 39.0 43.8 44.7 41.0 48.2
8 Denva 40.6 36.6 32.8 37.6 38.5 34.8 42.0
9 Sardarpura 43.6 39.6 35.8 40.6 41.5 37.8 45.0
10 Kalak 45.8 41.8 38.0 42.8 43.7 40.0 47.2


a) Day time Noise Levels (L
day
)

The day time noise levels ranged from 38.5 to 58.7 dB (A). The minimum value
38.5 dB (A) was recorded at Denva village and maximum value 58.7 dB (A) was
recorded at Jambusar. It is observed that the day time noise levels are in broadly
in accordance to the prescribed limit of 55 dB (A) for rural/ residential area/zone,
65 dB (A) for commercial area/zone and 75 dB (A) for industrial zones.

b) Night time Noise Levels (L
night
)

The night time noise levels ranged from 34.8 to 53.6 dB (A). The minimum value
34.8 dB (A) was observed at Denva village and maximum value 53.6 dB (A) was
observed at Jambusar. It is observed that the night time noise levels are in broadly
in accordance to the prescribed limit of 45 dB (A) for rural / residential area/zone,
55 dB (A) for commercial area/zone, and 65 dB (A) for industrial zones.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

3.10 Flora and Fauna Studies

3.10.1 Introduction

Natural flora and fauna are important features of the environment. They are
organized into natural communities and are sensitive to outside influences.
Integrating ecological thinking into the planning process is an urgent need in the
context of deterioration of natural environments, which is unwanted but direct
consequence of development. Biological communities, being dependent on the
condition and resources of its location may change if there is change in the
environment. Hence review of changes in the status of flora and fauna are an
elementary requirement of Environment Impact Assessment studies, in view of the
need for conservation of environment quality and biodiversity. Information on flora
and fauna was collected within the study area were collected from related
government offices.

3.10.2 Study Area and Location of Monitoring Stations for Ecological Sampling

Study area is delineated by taking a radius of 10 Km from proposed site. Biological
survey in study area was carried out using standard methods.

Jambusar is a taluka place in the Bharuch district Gujarat state in India. Study area
mostly comprises non-urbanized area. Most of the vegetation is aggregated on
agricultural boundaries and road side plantation. The study area mainly comprises
of terrestrial ecosystem (agricultural land, wasteland and barren land) and aquatic
ecosystem (Rivers, Creek, Lakes, Canals, etc.). Dhadhar River flows through the
eastern part of the study and empties in the gulf of Khambhat. The terrestrial area
is covered with dry deciduous type with dominance of Prosopis juliflora, Azadirachta
indica, Zizyphus jujuba, Syzigium cumini, Euphorbia sp. etc

Sampling locations was made with reference to topography, land use, vegetation
pattern, etc. The observations were taken on reserve forest, protected forest, village
forest and non-forest area (agricultural field, catchment area, on hills, in plain
areas, village wasteland, etc.) as per the objectives and guidelines of MoEF for
Environment Impact Assessment.

The list of sampling locations for ecological studies is given in Table-3.10.1 and
in Table-3.10.2 and shown in Figure-3.10.1.

TABLE-3.10.1
DETAILS OF TERRESTRIAL ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Name of the
location
Direction w.r.t
Proposed Power
Plant
Distance w.r.t
Proposed Power
Plant (km)
Environment setting
TE-1 Kanpur deh NE 0.3 Rural/Residential area
TE-2 Limaj N 4.7 Rural/Residential area
TE-3 Acchod ESE 4.6 Rural/Residential area
TE-4 Dolia NNW 2.2 Rural/Residential area

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.10.2
DETAILS OF AQUATIC ECOLOGICAL SAMPLING LOCATIONS

Code Name of the location Direction w.r.t Proposed
Power Plant
Remarks
AE-1 Dhadhar River near Mangrol Village S Fresh water
AE-2 Gulf water near Denva SW Saline water

3.10.3 Terrestrial Ecological Studies

3.10.3.1 Objectives of Ecological Study

The objectives of the present study are intended to:

Identify the floristic and faunal components of the study area;

Generate baseline data from field observations from various terrestrial and
aquatic ecosystems;

Ascertain migratory route of animals (Mammals and Birds), if any;

Find out the rare, threatened and endangered species of plants and animal in
the study area;

Predict the impact due to proposed activity on vegetation structure in and
around the project site and

Prepare the EMP based on the evaluation of impacts.

3.10.3.2 Methods Adopted for the Study

To accomplish the above objectives, a general ecological survey was conducted
covering an area of 10-km radius from proposed plant area. The survey included:

Generation of primary data to understand baseline ecological status,
important floristic elements;

Generation of primary data to understand baseline fauna structure; and

Collection of secondary data from Forest Working Plan and Gazetteers.

3.10.3.3 Criteria Adopted for Selection of Sampling Locations

Reconnaissance survey was conducted to identify the phyto-sociological sampling
location on the basis of following criteria:
Proximity to the proposed plant area;

Downwind direction of the proposed plant area; and

Upwind direction of the proposed plant area.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


FIGURE-3.10.1
ECOLOGICAL LOCATIONS
JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
TE1
TE3
TE4
TE2
Ecological Sampling Locations
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


(A) Plant Diversity

Vegetation diversity of the area

The coastal area is highly prone to the effect of tidal currents being close to sea
and Narmada estuary. The scanty xerophytic vegetation, so called `forest, was
observed around Dolia and Denva villages. However plant species observed were
some of the leguminous shrubs and small thorny trees of the genera Prosopis and
Acacia, while the population of domestic animals found is cow, buffalo, goat and
sheep.

Forest was found to be dry deciduous type. The trees, shrubs and herbs were
recorded for measuring plants importance is given in Table-3.10.3.

Vegetation type and its composition

The vegetation type is subtropical coastal thorny scrub jungles with trees
predominantly moist deciduous type but rarely evergreen. The natural vegetation
is scarce, scattered and open.

In the whole study area, dominant tree species are Prosopis juliflora and Acacia
nilotica. Other associated species in top storey are Albizzia lebbeck, Pongamia
pinnata, Phoenix sylvestris, Casuarina equisetifolia, Caesalpinia pulcherrinia,
Cassia siamea, Tamarindus indica, Azadirachta indica, Dalbergia sisso, Delonix
regia, Eucalyptus hybrid, Pithecelobium dulce, Leucaena leucocephala, Ficus
religiosa, Ficus benghalensis, Zizypus jujuba, Z. nummularia etc.

The middle storey is represented by species from the genera Calotropis,
Euphorbia, Lawsonia, Argemone, Jatropha etc.which are mainly shrubs.

The ground flora i.e herbs were seen on roadsides and open areas consisting of
Sida cordata, Abutilon indicum, Achyranthus aspera, Saligornia sp., Sesamum sp.
etc.

Climbers are less is the forest area although found in greater number in the
villages and are represented by Antigonon leptopus, Ipomoea sp. and members of
Cucurbitaceae family.

Regeneration of trees is poor as compared to herbs and shrubs in the study area
except for Propsopis sp., Acacia sp., Cassia sp. and Caesalpinia sp. Grasses
mainly cover open degraded land. Herbs and shrubs are abundant only during
monsoon, whereas during rest of the year when the land turns dry, herbs wither
and get wiped away from the vicinity. The ground vegetation was composed of
some perennial herbs (annual/biennial). The density and composition of
vegetation hardly changes with change in locations.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The reduction in vegetation cover is attributed to biotic pressures like fuel wood,
livestock grazing, clearing for industrial setup, agriculture, human habitation, loss
of fertility, erosion, salinity ingression etc.
Floristic Characteristic of Area along the Dhadhar River
The vegetation along the river Dhadhar is of dry deciduous type. The substrate
ranges from mud and silt to sand. The loss of the soil from the riverbanks further
leads to deforestation and instead weeds like Prosopis, Parthenium, Hyptis
suaveolens and Ipomea take over. Along the riverbank, natural vegetation is less
due to agricultural practices done by the nearby villagers. The bank slopes and
riverbeds are mostly bare showing scanty population.

The vegetation along the river side consists of Acacia nilotica, Zizyphus sp.,
Bombax ceiba, Prosopis juliflora etc. The undergrowth is moderate consisting
mostly of Vitex negundo, Ipomea fistulosa, Xanthium stomarium, Parthenium
histerofolium, Lantana camara, Hyptis suaveolens, Cassia tora, Argemone
mexicana, Acyranthus aspera, Alternanthera sp., Ageratum coinizoides etc.
Chara, Hydrilla, Vallisnaria, Typha sp., Polygonum sp, Eichornia sp. are some of
the major aquatic plants found in the fresh water zone of the Dhadhar river.

TABLE-3.10.3
LIST OF FLORA FOUND IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Botanical Name Local Name Family
Trees
1 Acacia tortilis Israeli Bawal Mimosaceae
2 Acacia auriculiformis Bengali Baval Mimosaceae
3 Acacia catechu Khair Mimosaceae
4 Acacia ferruginia Babar Khair Mimosaceae
5 Acacia leucophioea Harmo Baval, Aniyar Mimosaceae
6 Acacia nilotica Desi Baval Mimosaceae
7 Acacia Senegal Gorad, Kumto Mimosaceae
8 Adina cordifia Haldu Rubiaceae
9 Aegle marmelos Bili Rutaceae
10 Ailanthas excelsa Ardusa Simarubaceae
11 Albizzia lebbeck Siris Mimosaceae
12 Albizzia odoratissima Kalo Siras Mimosaceae
13 Albizzia procera Killai (kelvo) Mimosaceae
14 Annona squamosa Sitaphal Annonaceae
15 Anacardium occidentale Kaju Anacardiaceae
16 Anogeissus latifolia Dhavda, Dhamada Combretaceae
17 Anthocephalus indicus Kadam Rubiaceae
18 Artocarpus heterophyllus Fanas Moraceae
19 Avicennia sp. - Avicenniaceae
20 Azadirachta indica Limdo Meliaceae
21 Bauhinia purpurea Kachnar Caesalpiniaceae
22 Borassus flabellifer Tad (Todipalm) Arecaceae
23 Butea monosperma Khakhro Papilionaceae
24 Carica papaya Papaya Caricaeae
25 Cassia fistula Garmalo Caesalpiniaceae
26 Cassia siamea Kashid Caesalpiniaceae
27 Casuarina equisetifolia Sharu Casuarinaceae
28 Cocos nucifera Nariel Arecaceae
29 Dalbergia latifolia Sisam (Mota) Papilionaceae
30 Dalbergia sissoo Sissoo Papilionaceae
31 Delonix regia Gulmohar Caesalpiniaceae
32 Emblica officinalis Amla Euphorbiaceae
33 Eucalyptus species Nilgiri Myrtaceae
34 Ficus bengalensis Vad Moraceae
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

35 Ficus religiosa Pipdo Moraceae
36 Limonea acidissima Kothi Rutaceae
37 Mangifera indica Amba Anacardiaceae
38 Melia azaderach Bakam Limdo Meliaceae
39 Peltophorum pterocarpum Peltophorum Caesalpiniaceae
40 Phoenix sylvestris Khajuri Palmae (Arecaceae)
41 Pithecellobium dulce Mithi Amli (Goras Amli) Mimosaceae
42 Pongamia pinnata Karanj Papilionaceae
43 Prosopis cineraria Khijdo, Samdo Mimosaceae
44 Prosopis juliflora Gando Baval Mimosaceae
45 Psidium guajava Jamphal Myrtaceae
46 Syzygium cumunii Jambudo Myrtaceae
47 Tamarindus indica Amli Caesalpiniaceae
48 Tectona grandis Sag Verbenaceae
49 Terminalia bellerica Behdo Combretaceae
50 Terminalia chebula Herde Combretaceae
51 Terminalia catappa Badam Combretaceae
52 Zizyphus mauritiana Bor Rhamnaceae.
53 Zizyphus xylopyrus Ghat Bor Rhamnaceae
Shrubs
1 Abelmoschus esculentus Bhindi Malvaceae
2 Abubutilon indicum Khapat Malvaceae
3 Caesalpinia pulcherima Shankhasur Caeasalpiniaceae
4 Cajanus cajan Tuver Fabaceae
5 Calotropis gigantea Akdo Asclepiadaceae
6 Calotropis procera Akdo Asclepiadaceae
7 Cassia auriculata Aval. Caesalpiniaceae
8 Cirtus limon Limbu Rutaceae
9 Datura metel Dhanturo Solanaceae
10 Euphorbia nerifolia Thor Euphorbiaceae
11 Euphorbia nivulia Thor Euphorbiaceae
12 Euphorbia tirucalli Kharsani Euphorbiaceae
13 Jatropha curcas Ratanjot Euphorbiaceae
14 Lantana camara Lantana Verbenaceae
15 Lawsonia inermis Mehandi Lythraceae
16 Nerium indicum Kaner Apocynaceae
17 Opuntia elatior Phafdo thor Cactaceae
18 Parthenium hysterophorus Congress grass Astesaceae
19 Riccinus communis Divelo (Erandi) Lythraceae
20 Sida cordifolia Bala Malvaceae
21 Solanum indicum Ubhi Ringdi Solanaceae
22 Solanum melongena Rigana Solanpceae
23 Tephrosia purpurea Sartankho Fabaceae
24 Zizyphus nummularia Chanibor Rhamnaceae
25 Zizyphus rugosa To ran Rhamnaceae
Herbs
1 Argemone mexicana Darudi Papaveracea
2 Achyranthes aspera Anghedi Amaranthaceae
3 Agave Americana Ketki Agavaceae
4 Alternanthera pungens - Amaranthaceae
5 Amaranthus spinosus - Amaranthaceae
6 Arachis hypogea Mungfali Fabaceae
7 Brassica juncea Rai Brassicacea (Cruciferae)
8 Brassica oleracea Cobbij Brassicacea (Cruciferae)
9 Boerhavia diffusa Satodi Nyctaginaceae
10 Cyperus sp. - Cyperaceae
11 Cassia tora Kunvandio Caesalpiniaceae
12 Capsicum annum Marchi Solanaceae
13 Celosia argentea - Amaranthaceae
14 Chenopodium album Chilnt Bhaji Chenopodiaceae
15 Cleome gynandra Ghandhatu Capparaceae
16 Colocasia esculenta - Araceae
17 Euphorbia hirta - Euphorbiaceae
18 Euphorbia parviflora - Euphorbiaceae
19 Hyptis suaveolens - Lamiaceae
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

20 Ocimum sanctum Tulsi Lamiaceae
21 Oxalis corniculata Changer Oxalidaceae
22 Physalis minima - Solanaceae
23 Pistia stratiotes - Araceae
24 Sida cordata Bhoya bala Malvaceae
25 Tridax procumbens - Asteraceae
26 Typha angustata Ghabajariu Typhaceae
27 Xanthium strumarium - Asteraceae
28 Zea mays Makai Poaceae
Climbers
1 Asparagus racemosus Satavai Liliaceae
2 Bongainvillea spectabilis Boganvel Nyctaginaceae
3 Butea parivflora Khakharvel Papilionaceae
4 Coccinia grandis Ghiloda Cucurbitaceae
5 Cucurbita maxima Kolu Cucurbitaceae
Grasses
1 Heteropogon contortus Dadh-sulia Poaceae
2 Cymbopogon martinii Rosha Poaceae
3 Sida sp. Bhoya bala Malvaceae
4 Chenopodium sp. Chilnt bhaji Chenopodiaceae
5 Cynodon dactylon Darb Poacaea
6 Achyranthus aspera Anghedi Amaranthaceae
7 Andropogon sp. - Poaceae
8 Cenchrus biflorus Dhramnu Poacaea
9 Panicum antidotale Dhun Poaceae
10 Dicanthium anulatum Zinzvo Poaceae

Medicinal Plants in the Study Area

Medicinal plants found in the study area include Acacia nilotica, Datura
stramonium, Aloe vera, Eucalyptus sp., Azadirachta indica, Aegle marmelos,
Aerva lanata, Calotropis procera, Euphorbia hirta, Sida cordata etc. Medicinal
plants are not commercially exploited from this area.

Dhadhar River

The 120 km long Dhadhar River with the total catchment area of 4201 km
2
rises
in Shivrajpur in the Vindhya Mountains and joins the Gulf of Khambhat at Tankari
point. There is weir downstream of Achhod Village due to which the estuarine
segment is starved of freshwater during the dry season. The 5-8 km wide mouth
is full of sand banks and flats that confine the estuary to narrow and shallow
criss-crossed channels, which mostly dry during low tide.

Afforestation of Mangroves

The Gujarat state Forest Department has initiated the afforestation measures for
regeneration of mangroves in the Gulf of Khambat. Plantation of Avicennia sp.
was carried out in Bharuch district. Good coverage of Avicennia sp. was recorded
in some parts of Bharuch districts in the recent years. However, no mangroves
are observed within the study zone along the Dhadhar River.

Social Forestry

Inland and coastal plantation of trees has been carried out by Department of
Social forestry. Various schemes have been implemented to develop shelter belts,
village forests, fuel wood resources and rehabilitation of degraded forest land.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Shelter belts in the study area include plantation of shady, ornamental and fruit
bearing trees all along the road, and canal. Strip plantation have been carried out
in State Highways, National Highways, degraded land etc. wherever available.
Tree species used for social forestry in the study area include Casuarina
equisetifolia, Aegle marmelos, Dalbergia sissoo, Madhuca lantifolia, Cassia siamea
etc.

Agriculture

Agriculture is one of the main occupation of the local people in the entire study
area. The agricultural crops recorded to be grown as major crops in the study
area include Cotton (Gossipium spp.), Sugarcane (Canna indica), Bajra
(Pennisetum typhoides), Moong, Jowar, Tuwar etc. Other crops include Til
(Sesamum spp.), Groundnut (Arachis hypogaea), Soyabean (Glycene max),
Tobacco (Nicotiana tobacum) etc.

Threatened Plant Species

National threatened species are those found only in small numbers or those very
near to extinction in the country. India has a list of threatened species at the All
India level, published by the Botanical Survey of India entitled `Red Data Book`. Not
a single species out of 121 plant species was observed to be threatened in the study
area. However, there is intense anthropogenic pressure on flora, fauna and forest
resources, which are observed to be dwindling.

(B) Animal Diversity

Since animals are capable of movement from one place to another, this makes
their study entirely different. Therefore, specific methods were adopted for
counting these animals in the field. The on-site information collected during
survey was further enriched by the information collected from different secondary
sources.

Mammals: The diversity in fauna basically depends upon density and diversity of
flora. The richer the diversity among the flora better will be the diversity in fauna.
The study area has Dry Deciduous vegetation which is surrounded by agricultural
crops. Present conditions of the area do not support any higher mammals.
Animals like Hare, Mouse, Jackal, Fox, Wild boars and Squirrels are reported in
the study area. The faunal elements commonly reported in the study area are
presented in Table-3.10.4.

Reptiles: In snakes rat snake, Russells viper and Cobra were noted during
personal interviewing with local peoples. In Lizards, common garden lizard and
monitor lizards were also noted in the study area.

Avian fauna: Present study area shows variety of birds due to suitable climatic
conditions, availability of food, water and presence of scrub vegetation. Birds like
Cattle Egret, Black Drongo, Sparrow, Blue Rock Pigeon, Purple Sunbird, Bee-
eater, Indian myna, Babbler, Jungle crow, etc were recorded from the study area.
All these birds are resident birds. Resident migrants like Paradise flycatcher,
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Moorhen are also observed from the study area. List of birds is presented in
Table-3.10.4.

Rare, Endangered and Threatened Fauna in the Study Area

In the year 1972 Government of India made an Act to provide protection to wild
animals, birds and plants and for matters connected therewith which is known as
Wild life (Protection) Act, 1972. Under this act Animals are categorized in
Schedules to give maximum protection to the wild animals.

No threatened animals and / or birds species are found to be in the study area.

TABLE-3.10.4
LIST OF ANIMALS RECORDED IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr.
No.
Common Name Name of the Species Name of the Family Schedule
Mammalia
1 Common langur Presbytis entellus Cercopithecidae Schedule II: Part I
2 Common Mongoose Herpestes edwardsi Viverridae Schedule IV
3 Squirrel Funambulus pennanti Sciuridae Schedule IV
4 Rat Rattus rattus Muridae Schedule V
5 Indian hare Lepus nigricollis Leporidae Schedule IV
6 Indian bush rat Gobunda elloti Muridae -
7 Indian field mouse Mushbooduga Muridae -
Reptilia
8 Garden lizard Calotes versicolor Agamidae -
9 Rat snake Ptyas mucosus Colubridae -
10 Monitor lizard Varanus bengalensis Varanidae Schedule II :Part II
11 Indian chameleon Chameleon zegylanicus Chamaeleonidae -
Aves
12 Black bulbul Hypsipetes
madagascariensis
Pycnonotidae Schedule IV
13 Black drongo Dicrurus adsimilis Dicruridae Schedule IV
14 Cattle egret Bubulcus ibis Ardeidae Schedule IV
15 Common kite Milvus migrans Acciptridae Schedule IV
16 Crow pheasant Centropus sinensis Curculidae Schedule IV
17 House sparrow Passer domesticus Ploceidae Schedule IV
18 House swift Apus affinis Apodidae Schedule IV
19 Indian ring dove Streptopelia docaocto Columbidae Schedule IV
20 Jungle crow Corvus macrorhynchos Corvidae Schedule IV
21 Little cormorant Phalacrocorax niger Phalacracoracidae Schedule IV
22 Little egret Egretta garzetta Ardeidae Schedule IV
23 Roseringed parakeet Psittacula krameri Psittacidae Schedule IV
24 Red vented bulbul Pynonotus cafer cafer Pycnonotidae Schedule IV
25 White breasted kingfisher Haleyon smyrnensis - Schedule IV
26 Lesser Flamingo Phoeniconaias minor - Schedule IV
27 Common Flamingo Phoenicopterus roseus - Schedule IV
28 Indian Robin Saxicoloides fulicata - Schedule IV

3.10.4 Aquatic Ecological Studies

3.10.4.1 Fishery

Fishing activity is well established in Bharuch. Bombay duck constitutes major
commercial fishery followed by shrimp, Mudskippers, clupeids, mullets and catfish
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

of the total fish catch of the Gulf. Mudskippers (Boleopthalmus dussumieri) form
an important fishery in the mudflats all over the coast. List of marine fishes is
presented in Table-3.10.5.

TABLE-3.10.5
LIST OF MARINE FISH SPECIES FOUND IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Name of Fish
1 White pomfret
2 Black pomfret
3 Bombay Duck
4 Thread fin
5 Jaw fish
6 Hilsa
7 Other clupeids
8 Coilia
9 Shark
10 Mullet
11 Cat fish
12 Eel
13 Leather jacket
14 Seer fish
15 Indian salmon
16 Ribbon fish
17 Silver bar
18 Perch
19 Small scieneidies
20 Shrimp
21 Prawns(m)
22 Prawns(j)
23 Lobster
24 Crab
25 Levta
26 Cuttle/squids
27 Tuna
28 Carangies/macarel
29 Rani fish
30 Sole
31 Miscellaneous

3.10.4.2 Plankton Study

Protecting the environment and making efficient use of natural resources are two
of the most pressing demands in the present stage of social development.
Biological species viz. phytoplankton and zooplankton specific for a particular
environment condition are the best indicators of environment quality. The nature
and quality of biological species in a water body is dependent on various physico-
chemical characteristics of water such as pH, conductivity, nutrients, etc. and also
on the type of water body such as flowing waters and stagnant water. To
evaluate ecological impacts from the baseline information and undertake effective
management plan, aquatic ecological study may be outlined as follows:

To characterize water bodies like fresh waters; and
To understand their present biological status.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

To meet these objectives following methods were followed:

Generating data by actual field sampling and analysis in these areas through
field visits during study period; and

Discussion with local people to get the information for aquatic plants and aquatic
animals.

To fulfill these objectives and to understand the present status of aquatic
ecosystem, samples were collected from different fresh water system (rivers and
canals) under investigation. In order to get a clear picture and to assess the various
parameters of water, two sampling locations were identified for sampling. Samples
were collected during summer season. The sampling locations are presented in
Table-3.10.2 and depicted in Figure-3.10.1

Methodology Adopted for Aquatic Studies

Plankton Study

The biological species specific for a particular environment conditions are the best
indicators of environment quality. This includes different biological species such
as phytoplankton, zooplankton and bacteria.

Diatoms, desmids and dinophyceaen members are indicative of clean water
conditions. Increasing dominance of diatoms, ciliates, flagellates, chlorophycean
and cyanophycean species indicates progressively increasing trophic conditions.
Presence of Euglenophyceae indicates high eutrophic conditions. Planktonic
rotifers are usually more abundant in fresh water than estuarine waters. It is
believed that when crustacean and insect out number other groups the situation
reflects the enriched organic conditions of water. Thus, of certain organisms help
in classifying water body in trophic levels on knowing its physico chemical
characteristics.

The plankton samples were collected by using plankton net. The filamentous
algae and debris were avoided by filtering through the plankton net. The collected
sample was condensed to 100 ml by filtration and the samples were preserved
using pinch of Rose Bengal and 10 ml of 4% formaldehyde solution.

For the measurement of frequencies of various forms of Phytoplankton and
Zooplankton, one drop of the sedimented plankton was mounted on a micro-slide
and as many as 20 different microscopic fields situated at more or less even
distances from each other were examined and numbers of individual organisms
are counted. The plankton forms were identified up to species level and
expressed as organisms per milliliter of the sample and Shannon Weavers species
diversity index was calculated for each sample.

Diversity Index

Diversity of plankton depends on physico-chemical characteristics of water
especially on trophic levels in oligotrophic water. With increasing levels of
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

pollution such as mesotrophic or eutrophic conditions diversity of plankton
decreases. Shannon Weaver index is a measure of diversity of plankton, which
takes into account the total count of individual species count in a water samples
and is expressed as follows:
Where
|
.
|
\
|
|
.
|
\
|
=
n
n
n
n
d
1
10
1
log

n1= number of individuals of each individual species in the sample.
n= total number of individuals of all species in the sample.

It should also be noted that diversity is also susceptible to other parameters
such as turbidity, colour, nutrients and flow rates etc., particularly in hilly rivers.
A widely accepted ecological concept is that community with larger number of
species i.e. with high diversity will have high stability that can resist adverse
environment factors. The maximum value of Shannon weaver index of
phytoplankton for clean water has been reported to have been 6 though it may
differ slightly in different locations. Decrease in the value of index may thus be
taken as indicator of pollution. The index values three and above for zooplankton
is generally considered as indicators of healthy conditions of water bodies. The
values between 1 and 3 and less than one are believed to be mild and highly
polluted conditions respectively.

Diversity Indices of Dhadhar River
Phytoplankton group reported from two locations having dominance of
bacillariophyceae, chlorophyceae, Cyanophyceae and Euglenophyceae members.

About 20 algal species were recorded from the sampling locations out which mainly
belong to Chlorophyceae comprising of Chorella, Ankistrodesmus followed by
Bacillariophyceae which mainly represent pennate diatoms comprising Fragillaria
sp, Navicula sp, Nitzschia sp, Pinnularia sp, and Pleurosigma sp. during the study
period.

About 06 zooplankton species are recorded from all the sampling locations
Nauplius larva, Daphnia, Ceriodaphnia are observed in all the sampling locations.
Diversity of phytoplankton and zooplankton found to be 1.62 to 2.06 and 0.98 to
1.79 respectively. The details of diversity indices in study area are presented in
Table-3.10.6.

The list of plankton recorded in fresh water bodies in study area during study
period are presented in Table-3.10.7 and Table-3.10.8. On the basis of physico-
chemical analysis and biological analysis, these water bodies are mesotrophic in
nature.
TABLE-3.10.6
DETAILS OF DIVIERSITY INDICES IN STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Code Name of the
Location
Diversity Index
for Phytoplankton
Diversity Index for
Zooplankton
1 AE1 Dhadhar River 2.06 1.79
2 AE-2 Gulf water near
Denva
1.62 0.98
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

TABLE-3.10.7
LIST OF PHYTOPLANKTON SPECIES IDENTIFIED FROM STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Family Algal Species
1 Bacillariophyceae Navicula sp.
Nitzschia sp.
Gomphonema sp.
Diatoma sp.
Synedra sp.
Fragillaria sp.

Pinnularia braunii sp.
2 Chlorophyceae Chlamydomonas sp.
Chlorella sp.
Actinastrum sp.
Ankistodesmus sp.
Planktosphaeria sp.

Chlorococcum sp.
3 Cyanophyceae Nodularia sp.
Oscillatoria sp.
Phormidium sp.
Calothrix sp.
Merismopedia sp.

Anacystis sp.
4 Euglenophyceae Euglena sp.

TABLE-3.10.8
LIST OF ZOOPLANKTON SPECIES IDENTIFIED FROM STUDY AREA

Group Species
Copepoda Nauplius larva
Rotifera Brachionus
Keratella sp.
Asplancha sp
Cladocera Daphnia sp.
Ceriodaphnia sp

3.11 Demography and Socio-Economics

The growth of industrial sectors and infrastructure developments in and around
the agriculture dominant areas, villages and towns is bound to create its impact
on the socioeconomic aspects of the local population. The impacts may be
positive or negative depending upon the developmental activity. To assess the
impacts on the socioeconomics of the local people, it is necessary to study the
existing socioeconomic status of the local population, which will be helpful for
making efforts to further improve the quality of life in the area of study. To study
the socioeconomic aspects of people in the study area around proposed plant, the
required data has been collected from various secondary sources.

3.11.1 Methodology Adopted For the Study

The methodology adopted for the study mainly includes review of published
secondary data, the study area comes under Jambusar, Amod and Vagra talukas of
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Bharuch district in Gujarat state such as the District Census Statistics of 2001,
Bharuch district of Gujarat state for the parameters of demography, occupational
structure of people within the study area of 10 km radial distance from the
periphery of the proposed Project site.

The village wise demographic data as per 2001 Census is presented in
Annexure-VI. The salient features of the demographic and socio-economic
aspects are described in the following sections.

3.11.2 Review of Demographic and Socio-Economic Profile - 2001

The information on socioeconomic aspects of the study area has been compiled
from secondary sources, which include various public offices as indicated in the
above section. The sociological aspects of this study include human settlements,
demography, social such as scheduled castes and scheduled tribes and literacy
levels besides infrastructure facilities available in the study area. The economic
aspects include occupational structure of workers. The village wise demographic
data as per 2001 census is presented in Annexure-VI. The salient features of
the demographic and socioeconomic details are described in the following
sections.

3.11.3 Demographic Details 10 km Radius Study Area

3.11.3.1 Distribution of Population

As per 2001 census the study area consists of 94902 persons inhabited in the study
area of 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed plant. The
distribution of population in the study area of 10 km radius is shown in Table-
3.11.1. The males and females constitute about 51.65% and 48.35% in the study
area respectively.
TABLE-3.11.1
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION

Sr. No Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0 - 10 km
1 No. of Households 766 1863 15048 17677
2 Male Population 2145 4881 41989 49015
3 Female Population 2164 4561 39162 45887
4 Total Population 4309 9442 81151 94902
5 Male Population (0-6 years) 432 852 6139 7423
6 Female Population (0-6 years) 409 783 5717 6909
7 Total Population (0-6 years) 841 1635 11856 14332
8 Average Household Size 6 5 5 5
9 % of Males to Total Population 50 52 52 52
10
% of Females to Total
Population 50 48 48 48
11 Sex Ratio 1009 934 933 936
12 Density of Population/Km
2
107 98 346 256
Source: District Census Statistics -2001

3.11.3.2 Average Household Size

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

The study area had an average family size of 5 persons per household in 2001.
This is moderate family size and is in comparison with the other parts of the
district.
3.11.3.3 Population Density

The density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of 256
persons per km
2
(PP km
2
) as per 2001 census reports.

3.11.3.4 Sex Ratio

The configuration of male and female indicates that the males constitute to about
51.65% and 48.35% females to of the total population. The sex ratio i.e. the
number of females per 1000 males indirectly reveals certain sociological aspects
in relation with female births, infant mortality among female children and single
person family structure, a resultant of migration of industrial workers. The study
area on an average has 936 females per 1000 males.

3.11.4 Social Structure

In the study area about 13% population belong to Scheduled Tribes (ST) and 6%
Scheduled Castes (SC) indicating that about 19% of the population in the study
area belongs to socially weaker sections. The distribution of population in the
study area by social structure is shown in Table-3.11.2.

TABLE-3.11.2
DISTRIBUTION OF POPULATION BY SOCIAL STRUCTURE

Sr. No. Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0 - 10 km
1 Scheduled Castes 102 764 4704 5570
2 % to total population 2.4 9 6 6
3 Scheduled Tribes 845 2470 8697 12012
4 % to total population 20 26 11 13
5 Total SC and ST 947 3234 13401 17582
7 Other castes 3362 6208 67750 77320

3.11.5 Literacy Levels

The analysis of the literacy levels in the study area reveals an average literacy rate
of 64.13% as per 2001 census data. The distribution of literate and literacy rate in
the study area is given in Table-3.11.3.

The male literacy i.e. the percentage of literate males to the total literates of the
study area works out to be 58% The female literacy rate, which is an important
indicator for social change, is observed to be 42 % in the study area. This indicates
that there is a considerable need for sociological development in the region.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


TABLE-3.11.3
DISTRIBUTION OF LITERATE AND LITERACY RATES

Sr. No Particulars 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0 - 10 km
1 Total Literates 2712 5198 52949 60859
2 Average literacy (%) 63 55 65 64
3 Male Literates 1511 3169 30656 35336
4 Male Literacy (%) 35 34 38 37
5 Total Male 2145 4881 41989 49015
6 % Male Literates to total
Literates
56 61 58 58
7 Female Literates 1201 2029 22293 25523
8 Total Female 2164 4561 39162 45887
9 Female Literacy (%) 28 22 28 27
10 % Female Literates to Total
Literates
44 39 42 42

3.11.6 Occupational Structure

The occupational structure of residents in the study area is studied with reference
to main workers, marginal workers and non-workers. The main workers include 4
categories of workers defined by the Census Department consisting of cultivators,
agricultural laborers, those engaged in manufacturing, processing and repairs in
household industry; and others including those engaged in household industry,
construction, trade and commerce, transport and communication and all other
services.

The marginal workers are those workers engaged in some work for a period of
less than six months during the reference year prior to the census survey. The
non-workers include those engaged in unpaid household duties, students, retired
persons, dependents, beggars, vagrants etc.; institutional inmates or all other
non-workers who do not fall under the above categories.

As per 2001 census records altogether the main workers works out to be 29% of
the total population. The marginal workers and non-workers constitute to 8% and
63% of the total population respectively. The distribution of workers by
occupation indicates that the non-workers are the predominant population.The
occupational structure of the study area is shown in Table-3.11.4.

TABLE-3.11.4
OCCUPATIONAL STRUCTURE

Sr. No Occupation 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km
1 Total Main Workers 1085 3376 22957 27418
2 Percentage to Total Population (%) 25 36 28 29
3 Marginal Workers 634 975 5713 7322
5 Non-Workers 2590 5091 52481 60162
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3

Total Population 4309 9442 81151 94902

3.11.6.1 Dependency Ratio

Based on the occupational structure of the study area the dependency rate of
non-workers on the workers category has been estimated at 63.39, which is
considered to be low or moderate while indicating that most of the people are
engaged in some sort of income generating activity.

3.11.7 Infrastructure Facilities

The infrastructure and amenities available in the study area denotes the economic
well being of the region. Reasonably good levels of infrastructure facilities are
available in the study area, which consists of education, health care,
communications, transportation, etc.

A review of infrastructure facilities available in the area has been done based on
the available secondary data published in the Bharuch district primary census
abstract Gujarat. The infrastructure facilities available in about 26 villages of
Bharuch district of Gujarat are covered within the study area. The village-wise
infrastructure facilities available as per census records are presented in
Annexure-VI.

3.11.7.1 Educational Facilities

The educational facilities are almost evenly distributed in the area. In all, there are
37 primary schools, 6 secondary schools and none of middle school, colleges or
other educational institutions. All the high schools are situated in larger villages. A
few smaller villages are devoid of any educational institutions. The available
educational facilities in the area are given in Table-3.11.5.

TABLE-3.11.5
EDUCATIONAL FACILITIES IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr. No. Institution 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km
1 Primary schools 5 9 23 37
2 Middle schools 0 0 0 0
3 Secondary schools 0 1 5 6
4 Senior Secondary schools 0 0 2 2
5 Adult Education Centers 1 0 7 8
6 Other Education Centers 0 0 0 0
Source: District Primary Census statistics of Bharuch district of Gujarat -2001

3.11.7.2 Health Facilities

Different types of health facilities including hospitals, dispensaries and clinics are
available in the study area. The health facilities like hospitals are one, one primary
health center is available for the public; there are 6 dispensaries and others as
shown in Table-3.11.6.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3


TABLE- 3.11.6
HEALTH FACILITIES IN THE STUDY AREA

Sr.No Type of Institution 0-3 km 3-7 km 7-10 km 0-10 km
1 No. of Allopathic Hospital 0 0 1 1
2 No. of Ayurvedic Hospital 0 0 0 0
3 No. of Unani Hospital 0 0 0 0
4 No. of Homeopathic Hospital 0 0 0 0
5 Total Dispensaries 0 0 6 6
6 No. of Maternity and Child Welfare
Center
0 0 2 2
7 No. of Maternity Home 0 0 0 0
8 No. of Child Welfare Center 0 0 0 0
9 No. of Health Center 0 0 0 0
10 No. of Primary Health Center 0 0 1 1
11 No. of Family Welfare Center 1 1 3 5
12 No. of Nursing Home 0 0 0 0
13 No. of Registered Private Medical
Practitioners
1 1 8 10
14 No. of Subsided Medical
Practitioners
0 0 0 0
15 Other Medical Facilities 0 0 1 1
Source: District Primary Census statistics of Bharuch district of Gujarat -2001

3.11.7.3 Transport Facilities

The study area is served by rail and road transport facilities. About 22 villages
have paved road connections while 4 villages are having approaches only with
mud roads.

As a whole, the study area has moderate level of communication network.

3.11.7.4 Post and Telegraphs

The study area has only 16 Post and 1 Telegraphic service.

3.11.7.5 Electrification

Almost all villages in the study were electrified. Electricity was supplied for
domestic, agricultural, industrial and public lighting purposes. Subsequently the
electric connections have been given to many other villages.

3.11.7.6 Drinking Water Facility

Water supply in the study area is mainly from wells, hand pumps followed by
Tube wells and tanks.

8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-3



Chapter-4
Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures

4.0 ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Introduction

The description of the environmental baseline conditions are given in Chapter-3.
This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts from the
proposed power plant in the study area.

Generally, the environmental impacts can be categorized as either primary or
secondary. Primary impacts are those which are attributed directly to the project
and secondary impacts are those which are indirectly induced and typically include
the associated investment and changed patterns of social and economic activities by
the proposed action.

The Environment Management Plan (EMP) is required to ensure sustainable
development in the study area (10 km) of the proposed plant site, hence it needs to
be an all encompassive plan for which the proposed industry, Government,
Regulating agencies like Pollution Control Board working in the region and more
importantly the affected population of the study area need to extend their co-
operation and contribution.

The affected environmental attributes in the region are air quality, water quality,
soil, land use, land capability, ecology and public health. The Management Action
Plan aims at controlling pollution at the source level to the extent possible with the
available and affordable technology followed by treatment measures before they are
discharged.

The impacts of the proposed 7200MW gas based CCPP have been predicted for the
proposed plant assuming that the pollution due to the activities has already been
covered under baseline environmental monitoring. The proposed project would
create impact on the environment in two distinct phases:

During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short
term; and

During the operation phase which would have long term effects.

The construction and operational phase of the proposed project comprises various
activities each of which will have an impact on some or other environmental
parameters. Various impacts during the constructional and operational phase on the
environmental parameters have been studied to estimate the impact on
environment and mitigation measures for the same have been discussed briefly
below and elaborated in the subsequent sections.

4.2 Impacts during Construction Phase

This includes the following activities related to leveling of site, construction of main
plant and other related structures, erection of boilers, turbines and other related
equipment.


Chapter-4

4.2.1 Impact on Land use

The land requirement for the proposed plant is about 1900 acres (769 ha).

The construction of the CCPP would bring in certain immediate changes in the
landuse pattern of the area as well as in the vicinity. The construction activities
would attract a sizable labour population and the influx of population is likely to be
associated with construction of labour colony within the plant premises. This
however, would be temporary, especially in case of a CCPP where the gestation
period is short.

4.2.2 Impact on Soil

As the land is not rocky, no blasting is envisaged. As the site is generally plain only
moderate or nil grading work will be required. Though some mechanical equipment
is required, this activity will be labour intensive. The major impact will be change in
landuse pattern in and around the project site.

The construction activities will result in loss of topsoil to some extent in the plant
area. Except for much localized construction impacts at the plant site, no significant
adverse impact on soil in the surrounding area is anticipated.

4.2.3 Impact on Air Quality

During construction phase, suspended particulate matter will be the main pollutant,
which could be generated from site development activities and vehicular movement
on the road. However, concentration of NOx and CO may also slightly increase due
to the increased vehicular traffic movement. To mitigate these impacts, regular
sprinkling of water will be done at the construction site. The approach roads will be
black carpeted and this will help to reduce the fugitive emissions. The vehicles will
be kept in good order to minimize automobile exhaust.

The impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to the construction
phase. The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to
be negligible outside the plant boundaries. Proper upkeep and maintenance of
vehicles, sprinkling of water on roads and lush green plantation would greatly
reduce the impacts during the construction phase.

4.2.4 Impact on Noise Levels

The major sources of noise during the construction phase are vehicular traffic,
construction equipment like dozers, scrapers, concrete mixers, cranes, generators,
pumps, compressors, rock drills, pneumatic tools, saws, vibrators etc. The operation
of these equipment will generate noise ranging between 70-85 dB (A). The noise
produced during the construction will have significant impact on the ambient noise
levels. The construction equipment may have high noise levels, which can affect the
personnel, operating the machines. Use of proper personal protective equipment will
mitigate any significant impact of the noise generated by such equipment. Similarly,
as the major work will be carried out during the day time, the impact on the
neighborhood due to the activity will be negligible.

Chapter-4

4.2.5 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The land for the proposed project is completely barren in nature. Therefore, the
initial construction works at the project site involves no land clearance, cutting of
trees, filling and leveling since the land is barren. So the construction activity will
not result in any loss of either vegetation or potential agricultural productive land.

The removal of herbaceous vegetation from the soil and loosening of the top soil
generally causes soil erosion during dry season. However, such impacts would be
primarily confined to the project site during initial periods of the construction phase
and would be minimized through adoption of mitigative measures like paving and
surface treatment, water sprinkling and appropriate plantation programme. The
project site will be extensively landscaped with the development of green belt
consisting of a variety of plant species which would enrich the ecology of the area
and add to the aesthetics.

The construction activities lead to inward migration of a huge labor force in the area
and thus there would be pressure on trees in the area due to increase in fuel
demand. In order to prevent felling of trees in the neighboring areas, alternate fuel
will be arranged to meet the fuel requirement of labor force.

The increased vehicular traffic coupled with higher noise level due to various
constructional activities will drive away the fauna from the project site to the
neighboring area. As the project is devoid of forest and trees, it does not harbor any
fauna of importance. Therefore, the impact of constructional activities on fauna will
be negligible.

4.2.6 Impact on Aquatic Ecology

The land for the proposed project is completely barren in nature. Therefore, the
construction works at the project site will not involve significant land clearance
disturbing the vegetation. Some vegetation cover will be removed at the time of
construction activity. Greenbelt plan will be initiated during construction phase in
progressive manner which will have aesthetic value to the plant and also acts as
pollution sink. This will also help in controlling the fugitive dust generated during
construction.

The sewage from the labor colony will be treated in septic tanks and care will be
taken that untreated sewage from labor camps is not discharged. No major impacts
are envisaged on terrestrial ecology.

4.2.7 Demography and Socio-Economics

The impact of the CCPP would begin to be felt with the start up of the construction
activities.

As the labourers are generally unskilled, the locals would get opportunities for
employment during construction activities;


Chapter-4

In addition to the opportunity of getting employment as construction labourers,
the local population would also have employment opportunities in related service
activities like petty commercial establishments, small contracts/sub-contracts
and supply of construction materials for buildings and ancillary infrastructures
etc. Consequently, this may lead to economic upliftment of the local populace.

The sudden influx of a large number of people in search of job opportunities is
likely to bring in the inherent problems of rapid urbanization to the area. The
social conflicts between the guest and host communities are expected in the
initial stages of development. This is expected to get stabilized in a short period.

4.2.7.1 Population Expectations

People in the area generally welcome the project. Availability of barren land, vicinity
of gas pipelines and availability of sea water are the main reasons for the majority
of the respondents favoring the decision in selecting the project site.

Bharuch Power Limited proposed to undertake suitable community development
activities in the surrounding villages depending upon their needs and requirement.
These include construction of approach road, school, building, community hall,
drinking water and hospital etc.

4.3 Impacts during Operational Phase

The project involves generation and transmission of power. The following activities
related to the operational phase will have varying impacts on the environment and
are considered for impact assessment viz.:

Land use;
Soil;
Air Quality;
Water Resources and Quality;
Noise Levels;
Ecology - Terrestrial and Aquatic; and
Demography and Socio-economics.

The details on impact of the project activity on each of the above environmental
attributes are discussed below.

4.3.1 Land Use

The land requirement for the proposed plant is about 1900 acres (769 ha). The land
for the proposed project is presently a complete barren land and shall be further
used for the industrial purpose to establish the proposed 7200MW CCPP.


The impact of a power plant operated on a fuel as natural gas and or R-LNG on soil
characteristics is insignificant as compared to the impact of coal based projects.

Chapter-4

Land development activities may lead to soil erosion in the nearby land. Small scale
excavation will be carried out which will temporarily affect the surrounding land.

Combined cycle project operates on clean fuel and there is no solid waste generated
in any form from the process. The scale of operation is also much smaller as
compared to coal based projects. Under these circumstances, the operation of the
natural gas based power project will have practically no impact on the soils of the
area. However, the plant site will witness additional tree plantation in the form of
green belt development during the operational phase. Such plantation will stabilize
the soil and help recover from whatever little adverse impacts of the construction
phase.

4.3.3 Impact on Air Quality

The impact on air quality is assessed based on emissions of the proposed gas based
power project. The characteristics of air pollutants depend on the type of fuel used.

The proposed 7200MW CCPP shall run on gas with the consumptions of about 28
million Sm
3
per day. Since Natural gas and RLNG are clean and environment
friendly fuels, there may be no appreciable environment impact due to the operation
of the proposed CCPP. The gaseous emissions from operation of the proposed CCPP
are oxides of nitrogen, CO and unburnt hydrocarbon. Dry low NOx (DLN burner)
combustion system has been proposed by which NOx level can be maintained within
pollution board norms.

Eighteen (18) main stacks each of 70 m height and 18 bypass stacks of 45 m have
been envisaged with HRSG and GTs, respectively. There shall be provision of
continuous online monitoring for NOx, UHC, CO emission.

Various air emissions to the atmosphere due to burning of fuel are envisaged as
follows:

a) Suspended Particulate Matter (SPM) :

Natural gas/RLNG being clean and environment friendly fuels, SPM release to
atmosphere will be negligible,

b) Sulphur Dioxide (SO
2
) :

Natural gas/RLNG being clean and environment friendly fuels, sulphur dioxide
release to atmosphere will be negligible.

c) Nitrogen oxide (NOx) :

In order to keep NOx level within the stipulated limit `Dry Low NOx system is
envisaged.


Chapter-4

Details of Mathematical Modeling

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out employing
mathematical model based on a steady state gaussian plume dispersion model
designed for multiple point sources for short term. In the present case, Industrial
Source Complex [ISC3] dispersion model based on steady state gaussian plume
dispersion, designed for multiple point sources for short term and developed by
United States Environmental Protection Agency [USEPA] has been used for
simulations from point sources.

Model Options used for Computations

The options used for short term computations are:

The plume rise is estimated by Briggs formulae, but the final rise is always
limited to that of the mixing layer;
Stack tip downwash is not considered;
Buoyancy induced dispersion is used to describe the increasing plume
dispersion during the ascension phase;
Calms processing routine is used by default;
Wind profile exponents are used by default, Ìrwin;
Flat terrain is used for computations;
It is assumed that the pollutants do not undergo any physico chemical
transformations and that there is no pollutant removal by dry deposition;
Pollutant washout by rain is not considered; and
Cartesian coordinate system has been used for computations.

Model Input Data

The computations only deal with the major pollutant as Oxides of Nitrogen emitted
while firing of natural gas. The NO
x
emissions are calculated based on 50 ppm
emission standards while firing 100% gas. The detailed emission calculations are
given in Annexure-VII. The cumulative impacts of the proposed power plant in
near vicinity to the project site are addressed in Annexure-VII. The details of stack
emissions envisaged from the project are given in Table-4.1.


Chapter-4

TABLE-4.1
STACK EMISSION - DETAILS CONSIDERED FOR MODELING

Co-ordinates of
stack
Stack Details Pollutant
emission
Rate
(g/sec/GT)
Sr.No.
X-axis
(m)
Y-axis
(m)
Ht (m) Internal dia
at Top (m)
Temp of
exhaust
gases ( K)
Volumetric
flow rate
(Nm
3
/s)
NOx
1 0 0 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
2 -96.7 11.1 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
3 -132.4 15.2 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
4 -336.8 38.6 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
5 -372.6 42.7 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
6 -468.9 54.1 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
7 -504.9 57.9 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
8 -709.4 81.3 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
9 -745.1 85.4 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
10 35.8 -4.1 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
11 240.1 -27.5 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
12 275.9 -31.6 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
13 372.6 -42.7 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
14 408.3 -46.8 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
15 612.7 -70.2 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
16 648.5 -74.3 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
17 737.5 -84.5 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5
18 773.3 -88.6 70.0 6.4 373 20.0 48.5

Meteorological Data

Data recorded at the site on wind speed, direction, solar radiation and temperature
at one hour interval for the premonsoon was used as meteorological input. Model
simulations have been carried using the hourly Joint Frequency data viz. stability,
wind speed, mixing height and temperature.

Mixing Height

Hourly values of mixing heights estimated by Mr.R.N.Gupta (Spatial Distribution of
Hourly mixing depth over Indian Region) have been considered for Industrial Source
Complex model for modeling to establish the worst case scenario.

Modeling Results

The simulations were done to evaluate NO
x
likely to be contributed by the
proposed project. For the short-term simulations, the concentrations were
estimated to obtain an optimum description of variations in concentrations over
the site in 10-km radius covering 16 directions. The predicted results for NO
x
are
presented in Table-4.2.


Chapter-4

TABLE-4.2
PREDICTED 24-HOURLY SHORT TERM INCREMENTAL CONCENTRATIONS
(PREMONSOON SEASON)

Pollutant Incremental
Concentration ( g/m
3
)
Distance (km) Direction
NOx 27.4 2.8 NE

Modeling Results

The isopleth for NO
x
emissions for premonsoon season is given in Figure-4.1.

Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of Proposed Project

The resultant concentrations after the implementation of the proposed power
plant are given in following Table-4.3.

TABLE-4.3
RESULTANT BASELINE CONCENTRATIONS (PREMONSOON SEASON)

Concentrations ( g/m
3
) Pollutant
Maximum
Baseline
Maximum
Incremental
Resultant
AAQ
NAAQS
Limits (Ind/Res)
NOx 13.7 27.4 41.1 80

The incremental concentrations when superimposed over the baseline
concentrations, the resultant concentrations will be well within the permissible
National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) stipulated for
Industrial/residential/rural areas.

Comments on the Results

A perusal of the above table reveals that the maximum incremental short term 24
hourly GLCs for NO
x
likely to be encountered during premonsoon season are
27.4 g/m
3
at a distance of about 2.8 km in NE direction. The predictions indicate
that the area is unlikely to be significantly affected due to the proposed power
project.

4.3.4 Impact on Water Resources

The main water requirement for the CCPP is for cooling purpose. Hence no
pollution as such as released in liquid form. Closed cycle Condenser Cooling with
sea water is proposed to be envisaged. The hot water will be cooled in cooling
tower (Induced Draft).

All the waste water from neutralising pit of DM plant, HRSG blow down shall be
transferred to central monitoring basin, which acts as guard pond having two
compartments of RCC construction. Monitoring basin shall be provided with
recirculation cum disposal pump and before disposal parameters shall be
monitored.


Chapter-4


FIGURE-4.1
SHORT TERM 24 HOURLY INCREMENTAL GLCs OF NO
X

JAMBUSAR
Khanpur Deh
Pursa
Kalak
Vanseta
Dolia
Vanseta
Nadiad
Sardarpura
Limaj
Chandpor Bara
Kava
Vad
Panchpipla
Singarna
Tankari
Denva
Mangrol
Chanchvel
Roza Tankariya
Kolavana
AMOD
Achhod
Machasara
Intola
Ranipura
Mahapara
Magnad
Kundhal
Koteshwar
Bhankhetar
Nahier
Buva
D
H
A
D
H
A
R

R
I
V
E
R
AAQ1
AAQ2
AAQ4 AAQ3
AAQ7
AAQ9
AAQ10
AAQ6
AAQ5
AAQ8
Air Quality Sampling Locations
1
0
K
M
R.S
R.S
SCALE
1 0 1 2 Km
N
River / Nala
LEGEND
Project Site
C-8.6%
2.5%
W
SW

2
4
.7
%
S
W

4
.3
%
S
S
W

9
.0
%
S
S
E
2
.1
%
E 3.2%
ENE 0.2%
N
E
2
.0
% N
N
E
3
.0
%
N
8
.0
%
2
.8
%
N
N
W

1
8
.3
%
N
W

1.7%
W
NW

8.8% W
S
S
E
0
.6
%
ESE 0.2%
11 5 1
SCALE
19 >19 Km/hr
5%
SPEED CALM
-10000 -8000 -6000 -4000 -2000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
-10000 -8000 -6000 -4000 -2000 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 10000
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000
-10000
-8000
-6000
-4000
-2000
0
2000
4000
6000
8000
10000

Chapter-4

It is envisaged to draw around 500 MLD sea water for the proposed project, to be
used for different purposes including condenser cooling, may taken from adjoining
Dhadhar River/Sea. The raw water requirement for the project shall be about 30
MLD either to be met through desalination.

GoG has given consent on facilitating land, water and other infrastructure for the
project.

Similarly, there will not be any impact on the ground water resources, as there is no
proposal to use ground water for plant requirements.

4.3.4.1 Impact on Drainage of the Area
There are no natural drainage streams, flowing through in the power plant site. The
storm water drainage network will be will be planned such that there is no
disturbance of natural drainage system. Hence, no major adverse impact is
envisaged on the drainage and hydrology.

4.3.5 Impact on Water Quality

4.3.5.1 Wastewater Generation and Feasibility of Zero Discharge

Cooling tower blowdown will be used in HVAC makeup and service purposes.
Remaining blowdown will be routed to the Central Monitoring Basin. All the plant
drains, boiler blow down, DM plant wastewater and miscellaneous effluents of the
plant would be treated and collected in Central Monitoring Basin. Sewage
Treatment Plant (STP) has been proposed for treatment of domestic effluent from
the power plant. The treated wastewater will be utilized for greenbelt
development within the plant complex. The remaining wastewater after complying
all the applicable standards by SPCB/CPCB/MoEF shall be discharged into the
Dhadhar river.

The wastewater generated in the proposed project is given in Table-4.4. The
water balance diagram is shown in Figure-4.2.


Chapter-4


FIGURE-4.2
WATER BALANCE DIAGRAM

Chapter-4

TABLE-4.4
WATER REQUIREMENT AND WASTEWATER GENERATION

Water Quantity (m
3
/hr) Sr.
No.
Particulars
Fresh Water
Requirement
Wastewater
Generation
Losses

1 Cooling water make-up 16740 11160 5580
2 Desalination 3465 2079
2.1 Power Cycle 484 299 185
2.2 Domestic/Potable water 62 7 55
2.3 Service water including HVAC 840 430 410
2.4 Makeup for clarifier blow down,
system losses, evaporation, drift,
seepage and consumption
55 ---- 55
Total 21105 (1+2) 13975
(13239 - to sea
106- Greenbelt/
HVAC makeup/
Sludge treatment
630-Discharge
outside) 6285

The total wastewater quantity that would be generated from the proposed gas
based power project will be about 13975 m
3
/hr.

Cooling tower blow down, regeneration waste from demineralization (DM) plant,
filter backwash, waste from service water system, sanitary waste constitute the
main plant effluents.

Suspended solids and other constituents would be negligible. The blow down would
have very less quantity of dissolved solids. The blow down water from the HRSG will
be mixed with other effluents in the central basin, with the result the temperature
would reduce practically to the ambient levels.

The cooling tower blow down will be collected in the central monitoring basin. The
pH and temperature of the cooling tower blow down will be 7-8 and 30
o
C
respectively. This waste will be collected in the central basin.

All the parameters of the final effluent from central effluent holding pond will meet
the prescribed standards before discharge. This water will be used internally for
green belt development as much as required. The balance wastewater will be
discharged into sea through the pipeline. Thus, the impact on water quality will be
insignificant.


As gas will be used as fuel for the proposed CCPP, there will be no generation of
solid waste.

4.3.7 Impact on Solid Waste

solid waste.

Chapter-4

4.3.8 Impact on Noise Levels

The major noise generating units in a power plant are turbines, turbo-generators,
compressors, pumps, fans etc. Noise is continuously generated from such sources.
The noise emitting from each individual source will be of the order of 85 dB (A).
The ambient noise levels are well below the 75 dB (A) mark. The noise levels from
the proposed project will also be in the same range.

The major noise emitting sources in the power plant include:

1. Gas Turbine (1 m from acoustic enclosure) : 85 dB (A)
2. Steam Turbine : 85 dB (A)
3. Cooling Water Pumps : 85 dB (A)
4. Air Compressors : 85 dB (A)
5. Transformers : 70 dB (A)

For computing the noise levels at various distances with respect to the plant site,
predictions have been carried out using models.

4.3.8.1 Discussion of the Computed Results

The predicted ambient noise levels of <40 dB (A) are observed in 0.8 km radius
from the source of the plant and falls within the plant boundary. There will not be
any adverse impact on the nearby villages as the local residents will be exposed to a
noise level of < 30 dB (A). The predicted contours around the proposed plant are
shown in Figure-4.3.

The operators, workers and other personnel within the plant, however, may be
affected unless protective measures are taken. According to the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards, the allowable noise level for the
workers is 85 dB (A) for 8 hours exposure a day. It could be seen that in the plant
premises most of the machinery/equipment generate noise levels around 85 dB (A)
continuously. Therefore, adequate protective measures in the form of ear muffs/ear
plugs to the workers working in high noise areas need to be provided. All the
turbines will be provided acoustic enclosures to reduce the noise level. In addition,
reduction in noise levels in the high noise machinery areas could be achieved by
adoption of suitable preventive measures such as suitable building layout in which
the equipment are to be located, adding sound barriers, use of enclosures with
suitable absorption material, etc.

Proper precaution will be taken to keep noise level within prescribed limits. The
enclosure of GTG & STG will be designed for noise attenuation to reduce noise level
to 85 dB (A) at 1 m distance. The ambient noise level at 120 m from any part of
the plant (far field) inclusive of GTG/HRSG/STG shall not exceed 63 dB (A).

4.3.9 Impact on Ecology

The baseline flora and fauna has been depicted in Chapter-3. Accordingly, there is
no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km of the proposed project site. The impacts are
briefly described in the following sections.

Chapter-4

4.3.9.1 General Impacts

The major air pollutant envisaged from the project is NOx. The general impacts of
NOx on vegetation have been studied by scientists. Most of these studies are carried
out in laboratory conditions and on annual plants. There is a great paucity of
scientific data on tropical species and especially on forest species. However the
general impacts are as follows:

Nitrogen Oxides (NOx)

Three oxides of Nitrogen, i.e. N
2
O, NO and NO
2
are collectively referred to as NOx.
High temperature reactions in presence of air form NOx.

NOx is absorbed by plants through stomata, reacts with cell wall and forms HNO
2

and HNO
3
which is the cause of toxicity. The symptoms of injury include spots of
grey-green or light brown color, bleached or necrotic spots in interveinal areas
which later form streaks.

The atmospheric concentrations normally do not reach a level sufficient to induce
acute injury. The importance of NOx in the atmosphere lies in the fact that they
form raw material for formation of secondary pollutants like O
3
, smog and PAN.

NO and NO
2
are known to cause eye and nasal irritations. NO
2
is known to get
involved in formation of free radicals. At critical concentration (which differs with
nature, health and age of animal) NO
2
is known to cause lung edema, pulmonary
congestion, obliterative bronchiolitis, pneumonitis etc. The critical concentration in
case of wild animals is not known.

4.3.9.2 Impact on Terrestrial Ecology

The impact on terrestrial ecology will be due to emission of gaseous pollutant i.e.
NOx. NOx at a very low dose acts as atmospheric fertilizer for the vegetation.
However, at higher doses, they are injurious to both vegetation as well as animals.
NOx may also contribute to formation of secondary pollutants like ozone and Peroxy
Acetyl Nitrate (PAN) in certain weather conditions.

Among the oxides of nitrogen, NO
2
has been recognized as potent toxic pollutant
due to its direct impact on organisms and its role in photochemical smog cycle.


Chapter-4


FIGURE-4.3
PREDICTED NOISE LEVELS
-1000.00 -800.00 -600.00 -400.00 -200.00 0.00 200.00 400.00 600.00 800.00 1000.00
-1000.00
-800.00
-600.00
-400.00
-200.00
0.00
200.00
400.00
600.00
800.00
1000.00
-1000.00 -800.00 -600.00 -400.00 -200.00 0.00 200.00 400.00 600.00 800.00 1000.00
-1000.00
-800.00
-600.00
-400.00
-200.00
0.00
200.00
400.00
600.00
800.00
1000.00
-1000.00 -800.00 -600.00 -400.00 -200.00 0.00 200.00 400.00 600.00 800.00 1000.00
-1000.00 -800.00 -600.00 -400.00 -200.00 0.00 200.00 400.00 600.00 800.00 1000.00
-1000.00
-800.00
-600.00
-400.00
-200.00
0.00
200.00
400.00
600.00
800.00
1000.00
-1000.00
-800.00
-600.00
-400.00
-200.00
0.00
200.00
400.00
600.00
800.00
1000.00

Chapter-4

The phyto-toxic effect of NOx is expressed as chlorotic and necrotic symptoms on
the leaf lamina, accompanied with reduction in growth and production. Plants are
particularly susceptible to NOx pollution at their exponential phase of growth. It has
been reported that plant growth reduction and necrosis occurs on exposure to 3
ppm of NO
2
for 4 hours. The visible injury symptoms of NOx are irregular,
white/brown lesions in between veins and near leaf margins.

The proposed project will adopt efficient NOx control devices to keep NOx emission
within prescribed limit (50 ppm). Adequate stack height is provided for dispersion of
NOx. The proposed project will have insignificant impact on ambient air quality and
NOx concentration will remain within the NAAQ standards. Therefore, the impact of
these emissions on the surrounding agroecosystem will be insignificant.

It is proposed to include Azadirachta indica, Ficus religosa and Ficus recemosa in the
plantation programme as they serve as sink for gaseous emissions.

Extensive plantation comprising of pollutant resistant will be undertaken in and
around the project site, which will serve not only as pollution sink but also as noise
barrier. It is expected that with adoption of these mitigatory measures, the impact
due to operation of the power plant will be minimal on the terrestrial ecosystem.

4.3.9.3 Impact on Aquatic Ecology

There are no significant aquatic water bodies in the immediate vicinity of the plant.
The wastewater will be collected in a basin to allow for sufficient dilution and will be
used internally to the maximum extent. The balance will be discharged into the sea.
The effluent will be meeting all the discharge limits. Hence, there is no likelihood of
any adverse impact on the aquatic ecology.

4.3.10 Demography and Socio-Economics

The impact of the CCPP would begin to be felt with the start up of the operational
activities:

The out migration for employment, if any, will be reduced due to better
economic opportunities available in the area;
With the establishment of the CCPP, the area would also experience a sectoral
shift towards non-primary activities which is likely to boost the economy
considering the lower returns for poor quality of agricultural land in the area;
The dynamics of population growth once set in the area is likely to pick up with
the establishment of ancillary industries and associated service activities; and
With the commissioning of the plant, avenues would open up for the unskilled
labor in the transportation sector and service industry catering to the township.

4.3.10.1 Impact on Human Settlement

There will not be any impact of proposed project on human settlement since the
proposed project land is a complete barren government land without any
homestead oustees Hence, there will be no rehabilitation or resettlement issue
involved.

Chapter-4

4.3.10.2 Impact on Civic Amenities

The impact of economic development on civic amenities will be substantial. The area
has experienced a good network of roads, communication and provision of
amenities like water supply in the village areas. Many villages have been electrified
during the last decade. The overall impact of all these services will be beneficial as
they are important for development of the area. As the level of existing
communications and support services is poor, the overall impact is considered to be
positive.

4.3.10.3 Impact on Health

Impact on health, if any, will be primarily due to emissions of NOx and noise
generation. However, as explained above the impact from air and noise pollution
are going to be minimal. Hence, there will not be any health hazards from the
proposed project.

4.4 Mitigation Measures

The industrial development in the study area needs to be intertwined with judicious
utilization of non-renewable resources of the study area and within the limits of
permissible assimilative capacity. The assimilative capacity of the study area is the
maximum amount of pollution load that can be discharged in the environment
without affecting the designated use and is governed by dilution, dispersion, and
removal due to physicochemical and biological processes.

The identification and quantification of impacts based on scientific and mathematical
modeling have been presented in previous section. At the industry level, pollution
control measures include inbuilt process control measures and also external control
measures at the end of the pipeline before they are discharged into the receiving
bodies.

It has been evaluated that the study area has not been affected adversely with
present industrialization and is likely to get new economical fillip, not only for the
study area but for the region as a whole. Mitigation measures at the source level
and an overall Management Plan at the study area level are elicited so as to improve
the supportive capacity of the study area and also to preserve the assimilative
capacity of the receiving bodies.

The details of proposed control equipment to be provided are given in previous
section. The following additional mitigation measures are recommended in order to
synchronize the economic development of the study area with the environmental
protection of the region.

4.4.1 Summary of Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation

The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts and mitigation
measures are given in the Table-4.5.

Environmental Impact Assessment and Risk Assessment for the Proposed 7200 MW Gas Based Power Project at
Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-4

TABLE-4.5
ANTICIPATED ADVERSE ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION

Discipline Potential Negative
Impacts
Probable Source Mitigative Measures Remarks
Impacts at Construction Phase
Water Quality Increase in suspended
solids due to soil run-off
during heavy precipitation
Soil Erosion Temporary sedimentation Tank -
Air Quality Increase in fugitive dust
emission
Heavy vehicular
movement
Regular sprinkling of water in the construction area The impact will be low as the main
approach road is tarred
Noise Increase in noise level Construction equipments Equipments will be kept in good condition to keep the
noise level within 85 dB(A)
Workers will be provided necessary
protective equipment e.g. ear plug,
ear-muffs
Terrestrial
Ecology
Clearing of Vegetation -- Plantation will be done during the start of the project Lush green plantation will be done in
the project site
Socio-economics No displacement of
population
Land is completely a
government barren land
without any homestead
oustees
-- -
Impacts at Operation Phase
Water Quality Discharge of effluents into
surface water bodies
HRSG blowdown, cooling
tower blowdown, Filter
backwash, service water,
DM regeneration waste
and sanitary effluents
Adequate treatment facilities like neutralization pit,
settling ponds, biological treatment system etc. will
be provided so that the treated effluents conform to
the regulatory standards
All the plant effluents after according
treatment will be led to a central
monitoring basin. Most part of this
effluent will be used in Greenbelt
development. The excess treated
effluent which is harmless will be
discharged into the sea

Supplying treated waste water to
farmers free of cost for irrigation
Increase in NOx levels in
ambient air
Power Plant Gas turbines would be designed to keep the NOx
emission level to 50 ppm. Eighteen 70 m stack would
be provided to ensure wider dispersion of pollutants
Maximum short term ground level
concentration (GLC) of NOx due to
operation of CCPP would be of the
order of 41.1 g/m
3

Air Quality
DLN burners will be used Superimposing the maximum
background levels, the total NOx levels
Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed
Chapter-4

Discipline Potential Negative
Impacts
Probable Source Mitigative Measures Remarks
in ambient air due to operation of
CCPP are well below the stipulated
norms of 80 g/m
3
in residential areas
Increased SPM in ambient
air
Vehicular traffic All motorable roads in the plant area will be paved to
reduce dust emission
-

Green belt along the plant shall be created around
the plant area
-
Ecology Impact on plant species Emissions from stack Emission will be controlled as well as dispersed
through appropriate design
As emissions will be within limits, no
active injury to the vegetation is
expected.
Noise Increase in noise levels in
the plant area.
Equipment in main plant
and auxiliaries.
Equipment will be designed to conform to noise
levels prescribed by regulatory agencies. Acoustic
enclosure for the turbine will be provided to reduce
the noise levels
-
Provision of green belt and plantation would help in
attenuating noise
-
Demography and
Socio-economics
Strain on amenities like
housing, water sources
and sanitation, medical
and infrastructure facilities
Influx of people of
proposed power plant
employees as well as
contractor's
employees/laborers
It is proposed to build residential quarters for
permanent employees.
-
The summary of anticipated adverse environmental impacts and proposed mitigative measures are given in Table-4.5. The mitigative
measures to be adopted are given in the following sections.
8horuch
Fower L|m|fed Chapter-4

4.4.2 Mitigation Measures during Construction Phase

The impacts during the construction phase on the environment would be basically
of transient nature and are expected to reduce gradually on completion of the
construction activities.

In order to mitigate them following measures are proposed.

Recommendations

Designation and demarcation of sites for construction camps and ensuring due
provision of necessary infrastructural services.

During excavation and transportation over unmetalled roads, there is a scope
for local dust emissions. Frequent water sprinkling in the vicinity of the
construction activity should be done.

Since there is likelihood of fugitive dust from the construction activity, material
handling and from the truck movement in the premises of the proposed plant,
the industry should go for green belt plantation programme along the
boundaries of the proposed plant site.

The construction site should be provided with sufficient and suitable toilet
facilities for workers to allow proper standards of hygiene. These facilities would
be connected to a septic tank and maintained to ensure minimum
environmental impact.

Though the noise effect on the nearest inhabitants due to construction activity
will be negligible it is advisable that on site workers using high noise equipment
adopt noise protection devices. Noise prone activities should be restricted to the
extent possible during night particularly during the period 10 P.M to 6 A.M in
order to have minimum environmental impact.

It should be ensured that both gasoline and diesel powered construction
vehicles are properly maintained to minimize smoke in the exhaust emissions.
The vehicle maintenance area should be located in such a manner to prevent
contamination of surface and ground water sources by accidental spillages of
oil. Unauthorized dumping of waste oil should be prohibited.

As soon as construction is over the surplus earth should be utilized to fill up low
lying areas, the rubbish should be cleared and all un-built surfaces reinstated.
Appropriate vegetation should be planned and all such areas should be
landscaped. Hazardous materials [e.g acids, paints, explosives] should be
stored in proper and designated areas.

The project proponent shall ensure provision for necessary basic needs and
infrastructure facilities such as water supply, sanitary facilities, housing etc to
construction workers and their families.

8horuch

To prevent unauthorized felling of trees by construction workers for their fuel
needs, it should be ensured that the contractor provides fuel to the construction
workers.

4.4.3 Management during the Operation Phase

The main sources of air and water pollution during operation of the project would
be:

Gas turbine : Flue gas containing NOx
Cooling System : Cooling water discharge
Turbine Generator Bay : Service water effluent containing
suspended solids, oil & grease
Fuel handling and storage area : Waste containing oil & grease
Water treatment : Clarifier sludge, filter backwash, DM
Plant regeneration waste
4.4.3.1 Air Pollution Control Systems

NO
x
is the only pollutants from a natural gas based CCPP. The NO
x
emission from
gas turbine unit will be controlled to 50 ppm by using DNL burners. Height of the
stack will be 70 m. The air pollution control measures proposed for the project are
described below:

Recommendations

70 m tall stack should be provided to ensure wider dispersion of pollutants
Appropriate system to control NOx emissions to 50 ppm should be provided
Greenbelt development in and around the plant premises including
strengthening of greenbelt should be undertaken
The proposed air pollution control equipment should be installed prior to
commissioning of the plant
Monitoring of stack emissions for NOx should be carried out regularly to meet
the statutory requirements
All the internal roads should be asphalted to reduce the fugitive dust due to
vehicle movement
Use of personnel safety devices by the workers should be strictly enforced.

4.4.3.2 Water Pollution Control Systems

The wastewater will mainly be originating from cooling system, plant service water
system, Filter backwash and sanitary effluents from plant. All these wastes will be
treated and discharged on land to the extent possible to be utilized for green belt
through a Central Monitoring Basin.

Following effluent treatment and disposal systems are proposed to be installed:

Minimize quantity of effluents through reuse to the extent possible;
Treatment of DM plant waste through neutralization;
Provision of oil separators; and
Biological treatment for domestic waste from plant.
8horuch

The proposed waste management schemes are given in Table-4.6. The proposed
schemes for wastewater treatment and sewage treatment are given in Figure-4.4
and Figure-4.5 respectively.
TABLE-4.6
WASTE MANAGEMENT AT PROPOSED CCPP

Type of Waste Significant
Parameters
Treatment Proposed
Condenser Cooling
water
Temperature The waste will be collected in central
effluent holding pond and subsequently
diluted and temperature will be brought
down
Demineralization Plant
Waste
pH (4 to 10)
TDS (5000 mg/l)
pH Neutralization and mixing with other
effluents in central effluent holding pond
Service Water System Oil and Grease
Suspended Solids
The waste containing Oil and Grease will
be treated in oil separator and the
treated water will be routed to central
effluent holding pond
Sanitary Effluents BOD(200-250 mg/l)
TSS (300-450 mg/l)
The waste will be treated in proposed
STP

All the effluents will be collected in the central effluent holding pond. This treated
effluent will be used in greenbelt development to the maximum extent and rest will
be discharged into the sea after confirming the quality of the effluent to CPCB
standards and utilized mainly for agricultural purpose.

Effluent monitoring instruments namely pH meter, flow meter etc., should be
provided in the effluent discharge line. Flow integrators should be provided both at
the plant intake and discharge point at central effluent holding pond.

Apart from the proposed treatment schemes, some additional measures are given
hereunder:

Recommendations

Minimize quantity of effluents through reuse to the maximum extent feasible;

The treatment schemes proposed should be constructed before the
commissioning of the plant;

Sedimentation tanks should be cleaned regularly in order to avoid clogging.
Sludge should be removed regularly and sufficient time should be given for
proper settling of solids;

The treatment units viz., STP should be operated regularly;

Monthly effluent samples should be collected and analyzed at the inlet and
outlet of the treatment plants to ascertain the efficiency of the treatment plants
and to meet the statutory requirements.

8horuch


FIGURE-4.4
SCHEME FOR PROPOSED WASTEWATER TREAMENT
O
i
ly
W
a
t
e
r
f
r
o
m
S
t
e
a
m
T
u
r
b
i
n
e

A
r
e
a
O
il
y

W
a
t
e
r

f
r
o
m
f
u
e
l
O
i
l
A
r
e
a
O
i
ly

W
a
t
e
r

f
r
o
m
T
r
a
n
s
f
o
r
m
e
r

A
r
e
a
W
a
s
h

W
a
t
e
r

W
a
s
t
e

f
r
o
m

U
t
i
li
t
y

A
r
e
a
S
e
r
v
i
c
e

W
a
t
e
r
W
a
s
t
e
C
o
o
l
i
n
g

T
o
w
e
r

B
l
o
w
d
o
w
n
N
e
u
t
r
a
l
i
z
a
t
i
o
n
D
M

P
l
a
n
t

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t
.
S
l
u
d
g
e

T
h
i
c
k
e
n
e
r

E
f
f
l
u
e
n
t
C
o
m
m
o
n

C
o
l
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
u
m
p
R
e
c
o
v
e
r
e
d
O
i
l

T
a
n
k
A
P
I
S
e
p
e
r
a
t
o
r
L
i
m
e
+
A
l
u
m
D
o
s
i
n
g
C
o
m
m
o
n

C
o
l
l
e
c
t
i
o
n
S
u
m
p
L
a
m
e
l
l
a

C
l
a
r
i
f
i
e
r
C
l
e
a
n

W
a
t
e
r

S
u
m
p
S
l
u
d
g
e

S
u
m
p
S
l
u
d
g
e

S
u
m
p
S
l
u
d
g
e

T
h
i
c
k
e
n
e
r
C
e
n
t
r
i
f
u
g
e
T
o

C
M
B
s
S
o
l
i
d

D
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
C
M
B
-
1
C
e
n
t
r
a
l

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

B
a
s
i
n
s
C
M
B
-
2
C
e
n
t
r
a
l

M
o
n
i
t
o
r
i
n
g

B
a
s
i
n
s
T
o

G
r
e
e
n
b
e
l
t
F i n a l D i s p o s a l
C
l
e
a
n

W
a
t
e
r

S
u
m
p
O
i
l

R
e
m
o
v
a
l
D
r
u
m
/
B
u
c
k
e
t
T
P
I
S
e
p
a
r
a
t
o
r
L
o
c
a
l

B
o
i
l
e
r
B
l
o
w

D
o
w
n

S
u
m
p
L
o
c
a
l
S
u
m
p
L
o
c
a
l
S
u
m
p
L
o
c
a
l
S
u
m
p
P
o
w
e
r

C
y
c
l
e
B
l
o
w

D
o
w
n
W
a
s
t
e

F
r
o
m
t
o

H
R
S
G

A
r
e
a
8horuch


FIGURE-4.5
SCHEME FOR PROPOSED SEWAGE TREATMENT PLANT
C
h
l
o
r
i
n
e
D
o
s
i
n
g

T
a
n
k
T
r
e
a
t
e
d

W
a
s
t
e

W
a
t
e
r

D
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
D
r
i
e
d

S
l
u
d
g
e

C
a
k
e

O
u
t

f
o
r

D
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
B
y

D
u
m
p
e
r
A
i
r

B
l
o
w
e
r
s
S
l
u
d
g
e

R
e
c
y
c
l
i
n
g
M
o
t
o
r
S
l
u
d
g
e

W
a
s
t
i
n
g
A
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

T
a
n
k
C
l
a
r
i
f
i
e
r

T
a
n
k
C
h
l
o
r
i
n
e

C
o
n
t
a
c
t

T
a
n
k
S
l
u
d
g
e

D
r
y
i
n
g

B
e
d
s
F
i
l
t
e
r
a
t
e
S
e
w
a
g
e

W
a
t
e
r

I
n
S
e
w
a
g
e

T
r
a
n
s
f
e
r

P
u
m
p
P
u
m
p

S
u
m
p
B
O
D

:

B
i
o
c
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

O
x
y
z
e
n

D
e
m
a
n
d
C
O
D

:

C
h
e
m
i
c
a
l

O
x
y
z
e
n

D
e
m
a
n
d
T
S
S

:

T
o
t
a
l

S
u
s
p
e
n
d
e
d

S
o
l
i
d
s
8horuch

4.4.3.3 Rainwater Harvesting System
Rain water harvesting structures are proposed for the proposed unit for utilization
and to recharge the water resources in the region.

Rain water harvesting structures are proposed to recharge the ground water
resources in the region. The runoff water from the roof of the structures and paved
areas will be collected through storm water drainage system and led to rain water
harvesting structures. The final location of structures will be decided during detailed
engineering of the project. The typical rain water harvesting structure is shown in
Figure-4.6.

4.4.3.4 Solid Waste Management Plan

Solid wastes generated from the plant are basically from sedimentation tanks and
sewage treatment plants. The solid waste does not contain any toxic matter and
safe to dispose of on land. The waste should be disposed in an identified area in the
plant premises.

Separate land should be identified for disposal of sludge from the treatment
plants.
Sludge from the STP, which will be biological in nature, should be used as
manure for development of greenbelt development.
The sludge from the sewage treatment plant would be dried in drying beds and
disinfected with bleaching powder to prevent the formation and spreading of
pathogenic organisms.

4.4.3.5 Measures for Improvement of Ecology

There is no wildlife sanctuary within the 10 km radius of the proposed plant. The
area is surrounded by barren and agricultural land. The land identified for the
proposed power plant is barren and does not host any significant flora or fauna,
except for a few patches of shrubs and a few trees. Moreover, the resultant
ambient air quality levels after the operation of the plant will be within the
prescribed limits, impact on flora and fauna is not envisaged.

Recommendations

Clearing of existing vegetation should be kept to minimum and should be done
only when absolutely necessary. Even then clear felling of big trees should be
kept to bare minimum.

Plantation programme should be undertaken in all available areas. This should
include plantation in the proposed plant premises, along the internal and
external roads, on solid waste dump yards and along the administrative
buildings and the stacking yards.

8horuch


FIGURE-4.6
TYPICAL RAINWATER HARVESTING STRUCTURE
8horuch

The spent transformer oil, spent lubricants generated at proposed project shall
be handled/managed as per the norms prescribed in Hazardous management
rules (Amendment in 2003) i.e. after obtaining necessary approval from
Gujarat PCB.

4.4.3.5 Noise Level Management

The predominant noise levels will be confined to the work zones in the plant. The
noise levels at all the sources will not exceed 85 dB (A). The L
eq
of eight hours will
be within the prescribed limits. Community noise levels are not likely to be affected
because of the proposed vegetation and attenuation due to the physical barriers.

Recommendations

The use of damping materials such as thin rubber/lead sheet for wrapping the work
places like turbine halls, compressor rooms, DG set etc;

Shock absorbing techniques should be adopted to reduce impact;

Efficient flow techniques for noise associated with high fluid velocities and
turbulence should be used [like reduction in noise generated by control levels in
both gas and liquid systems achieved by reducing system pressure to as low as
possible];

All the openings like covers, partitions should be acoustically sealed;

Inlet and outlet mufflers should be provided which are easy to design and
construct;

Reflected noise should be reduced by the use of absorbing material on roofs
walls and floors;

Ear plugs should be provided to the workers, and it should be enforced to be
used by the workers;

Increase the distance between source and receiver and by altering the relative
orientation of the source and receiver. Noise level at the receiver end reduces in
inverse proportion to the square of the distance between the receiver and the
source;

Provision of separate cabins for workers/operators;

The industrial compound should be thickly vegetated with species of rich
canopy.

Use of biogas, solar energy, should be encouraged both at individual and at
society levels.

People should be educated and trained in social forestry activities by local
governmental and non-governmental organizations.
8horuch

Plantation for Aesthetics

Plantation in plant area should be done along the narrow and broad internal roads.
This will not only improve the flora in the region but will add to the aesthetics of
the region.

4.4.3.6 Greenbelt Development

Green Belt shall be developed within and throughout the periphery of the project
area.

The plantation and green belt development in the plant not only functions as
foreground and background landscape features resulting in harmonizing and
amalgamating the physical structures of the power station with surrounding
environment but also acts as pollution sink. Thus, implementation of afforestation
programs is of paramount importance for any industrial development. In addition
to augmenting present vegetation, it will also check soil erosion, make the
ecosystem more complex and functionally more stable, make the climate more
conducive and restore water balance. It can also be employed to bring areas with
special problems under vegetal cover and prevent further land deterioration.

Details of Greenbelt

In the proposed greenbelt, trees will be planted with a density of 1500-2000
trees/ha. Greenbelt with a width of 50 m will be developed around the plant
boundary. The total greenbelt around the power plant complex will be about 470
acres (188 ha), which amounts to about 33% of total project area. A capital cost of
Rs. 1.0 Crore has been allocated for the green belt development.

In the proposed greenbelt with 3,76,000 trees will be planted with a density of
2000 trees/ha. Annual budget of Rs.0.2 Crores will be earmarked for this
purpose. The plantation schedule will be completed within five years from the
construction period of the project. This green belt will be planned as per
guidelines issued by CPCB. The plantation schedule is given in Table 4.7.

TABLE-4.7
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT SCHEDULE

Sr.
No.
Year Area (ha) No. Saplings
1 1
st
Year 32 75200
2 2
nd
Year 32 75200
3 3
rd
Year 32 75200
4 4
th
Year 32 75200
5 5
th
Year 32 75200
Total 160 376000

Criteria for selection of species:

Species are selected considering following criteria and are given in Table-4.8;

8horuch

Tolerance to specific conditions or alternatively wide adaptability to
ecophysiological conditions;
Rapid growth;
Capacity to endure water stress and climatic extremes after initial
establishment;
Differences in height and growth habits;
Pleasing appearance;
Providing shade;
Large bio-mass and leaves number to provide fodder and fuel;
Ability of fixing atmospheric Nitrogen; and
Improving waste lands.

Some of the species which are locally planted are exotic. They have been tried
elsewhere in a variety of habitats and possess advantages over indigenous species.
As the most important need is to bring land under vegetative cover they have been
grown. Local or indigenous species are also in plantation schemes because diversity
in species confers stability to the ecosystem.

Species considered for Plantation
Based on climate and soil characteristics of the study area, species are selected for
plantation. The climate of the region is extreme, where there is moderate rainfall
as well as extreme heat and soil temperature is very high in summer. Hence in
order to have a ground cover, some fast growing species which do not require
watering have been considered for mass plantation. Experimental trial will be
conducted for the suitability and sustainability of the species. The greenbelt
development for proposed project will be undertaken. The proposed greenbelt
development within the plant is shown in Figure-4.7.

TABLE-4.8
LIST OF SPECIES PROPOSED WITHIN PLANT

Sr. No. Botanical Names of Planted Species
1 Acacia senegal
2 Aegle marmelos
3 Aesculus hippocastanum
4 Ailenthus altissima
5 Alstonia Scholaries
6 Annona reticulata
7 Annona squamosa
8 Araucaria imbricate
9 Arica catechu
10 Artocarpus heterophyllus
11 Azadirechta indica
12 Bauhinia variegata
13 Bignonia capensis
14 Bogenavillea spectabilis
15 Callistemon lanceolatus
16 Calophyllum inophyllum
17 Casia siamia
18 Cassia biflora
19 Cassia Fistula
20 Cesalpinia spinosa
21 Cocos nucifera
22 Cocos nucifera (Hybrid)
23 Crotan bonplandianum
8horuch

Sr. No. Botanical Names of Planted Species
24 Cyperus esculentus
25 Dalbergia sissoo
26 Dolenix regia
27 Emblica officinalis
28 Eucalyptus
29 Eugenia uniflora
30 Ficus benghalensis
31 Ficus religiosa
32 Galphimia glauca
33 Gardinia augusta
34 Gmelina arboria
35 Greveria robusta
36 Grevillea robusta
37 Helleborus orientalis
38 Hibiscus rosa sinensis
39 Hylocereus undatusf
40 Ixora coccinea
41 Jatropha curcas
42 Legastromia alota
43 Legastromia speciosa
44 Madhuca longfolia
45 Magnolia champaca
46 Mangifera indica
47 Melia azedarach
48 Millingtonia hortensis
49 Mimusops elengi
50 mussaenda frondosa
51 Mussaenda grandiflora
52 Nandivardan drawf
53 Nandivardhan
54 Neriun odorum
55 Nyctanthes arbor-tristis
56 Parkia biglandulosa
57 Peltophorum pterocarpum
58 Pentas lanceolata
59 Phoenix dactylifera
60 Plumbago capensis
61 Polyalthia longifolia
62 Pongamia glabra
63 Prunus certonia
64 Prunus glandulosa
65 Punica granatum
66 Rosa indica
67 Roystonea regia
68 Sapindus Mukorossi
69 Saraca indica
70 Spathodea campanulata
71 Swetinia mahogany
72 Syzygium cuminii
73 Tabebuia chrysotricha
74 Tacoma goulicholi
75 Terminalia arjuna
76 Terminalia bellerica
77 Terminalia catappa
78 Thespesia populnea
79 Thevetia nerifolia
80 Ticoma capensis
81 Tictona grandis
82 Fruits & Miscellaneous
8horuch


FIGURE-4.7
GREENBELT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
N
E
N
W
S
S
E
S
W
W
E
P
L
A
N
T
N
O
R
T
H
C
A
L
M
W
IN
D
R
O
S
E
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
c
o
o
c
.n
o

:
o
w
t
s
.
-
o
v
-

o
o
s
t
-
:
.
o
v

-
c
/
n
:

s

t
:
-
w / t - o o s t
c / c o o c o c o n \
P U M P
H O U S E
t--cotn:
o.sc/ot
o / s - . - t
c . n t
swtt: w/:t
.n:/st -.-tc.nt
s t / w / : t
. n : / s t - . - t c . n t
o
t
s
/
c
.n
/
:
.o
n

-
c
/
n
:
Environmental Impact Assessment and Risk Assessment for the Proposed
7200 MW Gas Based Power Project at Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar Taluka,
Bharuch District, Gujarat
Chapter-5
Analysis of Alternative Technology & Site

5.0 ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVE TECHNOLOGY AND SITE

5.1 Analysis of Alternative Technology

The selection of the proper steam generator technology is a critical step in the
basic design of a power project. The fuel to be fired and the steam cycle to be
adopted dictates the type of steam generator needed to satisfy the requirements
of the project.

Conventional steam-producing thermal power plants generate electricity through
a series of energy conversion stages: fuel is burned in boilers to convert water to
high-pressure steam, which is then used to drive a turbine to generate electricity.

Combined-cycle units burn fuel in a combustion chamber, and the exhaust gases
are used to drive a turbine. Waste heat boilers recover energy from the turbine
exhaust gases for the production of steam, which is then used to drive another
turbine. Generally, the total efficiency of a combined-cycle system in terms of the
amount of electricity generated per unit of fuel is greater than for conventional
thermal power systems, but the combined- cycle system may require fuels such
as natural gas.

5.2 Selection of Technology

In order to augment the generation capacity in the state, Bharuch Power Limited,
a wholly owned subsidiary of M/s Reliance Patalganga Power Ltd., proposes to set
up a power project with capacity of 7200 MW in Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch
District, Gujarat. The fuel to be used for the proposed power project is Natural
Gas and / or RLNG (Dual fuel), which are clean, green and environment friendly
fuels. It is also envisaged to use HSD as an emergency fuel during non availability
of natural gas/RLNG, for a maximum of 3 days in a year.

Combined Cycle Power Plant (CCPP) has become an important mode of capacity
addition as power generating units in most parts of the world. This is attributed to
their highest efficiency, low installed cost per kilowatt, shorter construction
schedule and low emission levels, and hence proved its reliability over last few
decades. Improvement in gas turbine technology and optimising steam cycle
parameters have led to thermal efficiency approaching to 56-60 percent for gas
based CCPP. Gas based power plant employing combined cycle are not only
environmentally cleaner, but enjoy other advantages over conventional power
stations such as lower installation cost, lower water requirement, less space and
shorter gestation period. The benefit of a CCPP, however depend on plants
specific mode of operation and availability of clean fuel.

Since Natural gas and RLNG are clean and environment friendly fuels, there may
be no appreciable environment impact due to the operation of the proposed CCPP.
The gaseous emissions from operation of the proposed CCPP are oxides of
nitrogen, CO and unburnt hydrocarbon. Dry low NOx (DLN burner) combustion
system has been proposed by which NOx level can be maintained within pollution
board norms.

Chapter-5

5.3 Analysis of Alternative Site

Five locations in Bharuch District have been examined for identifying the suitable
site for proposed power project. The survey was conducted for the following sites,

1. Dahej and Kadodara village
2. Akhod and Nandida village
3. Kaladara village
4. Kharchi village
5. Khanpur Deh village

The Site Selection Survey to determine the most feasible site has been carried
out. The site has been critically evaluated based on the feasibility to set up the
proposed power project. The alternative sites have been evaluated based on
physical inspection geographical site conditions and validations.

5.3.1 Description of Potential Sites for Gas Based Power Project

Alternative Site-I (at Dahej and Kadodra villages, Vagra taluka,
Bharuch district)

Geographical Location

The site is located within the revenue limits of Dahej and Kadodara villages of
Vagra Taluka, Bharuch district, Gujarat State. The proposed area is roughly
rectangular in shape.On the west of the power plant lies the Gulf of Cambay. It
lies approx. 45 km west of Bharuch on west of Dahej-Amod State Highway.

Approx. Size

The available area is abut 1630 acres.

Land Use Pattern

Majority of land is located close to Gulf of Cambay and is agricultural land. Cotton
is the major crop cultivated in this area in the monsoon season.

Terrain Type

Terrain is flat and mainly consists of normal clayey soil (Black Cotton Soil).

Other Details

The land under reconnaissance will be located 150 m away from the CRZ limit and
500 m away from Dahej-Amod State Highway. An ONGC Drill Site is located
within the North East limit of the proposed plant. An IOCL pipeline of 12 dia.
from Dahej to Baroda crosses the proposed power plant site for a length of
approx. 4.8 km.

Chapter-5

Alternative Site-II (At Akhod and Nandida villages, Vagra taluka,
Bharuch district)


The site is located within the revenue limits of Akhod and Nandida villages, Vagra
taluka, Bharuch district, Gujarat state. It is located on the west of Bharuch and on
east & west side of Rahiyad-Vagra Road

Approx. Size

The land is about 3380 acres.

Land Use Pattern

The land is agricultural with Black Cotton Soil and Cotton & Tuver are cultivated
as major crops. Now the area is served by Canal Network of Narmada Branch
Canal. The land is moderately fertile.

Terrain Type

Part of area falls under GIDC Dahej and terrain is flat and mainly consists of
normal clayey soil (Black Cotton Soil).

Other Details

SH-161 passes through the proposed power plant site.Out of the area selected it
has been observed that no existing or planned Drill Site lies in the concerned
area. An ex. 42 dia. DVPL GAIL pipeline passes through the proposed power
plant site. The minor and distributaries of Luwara Branch Canal (Narmada) passes
through area .

Alternative Site-III (at Kaladara village, Vagra Taluka, Bharuch
district)


The site is located in Kaladara village, Vagra taluka, Bharuch district, Gujarat
state. The proposed site is bounded by Bhukhi River on its West, Narmada on
South and Dahej-Bharuch - SH to North. The southern boundary of the site
extends upto pipeline corridor limit.

Approx. Size

The area available is 2450 acres.

Land Use Pattern

The land is comparatively fertile and cotton is the major crop cultivated here.

Chapter-5

Terrain Type

The terrain is flat and mainly consists of normal clayey yellow soil.

Other Details

One 4 dia Oil Pipe line of ONGC passes through the area. Two roads connencting
Kaladara village site with SH-6 pass through the proposed site. A Shaft ship yard
is located on the south of this proposed alternative site. Out of the area selected
it has been observed that no existing or planned Drill Site of ONGC lies in the
concerned area.

Alternative Site-IV (at Kapalsadi, Untia, Sardarpura, Kharchi,
Kharchi-Bhilwara villages, Jhagadia taluka, Bharuch district)


The site is located on the northern revenue limits of Kapalsadi, Untia, Sardarpura,
Kharchi, Kharchi-Bhilwara villages, Jhagadia taluka, Bharuch district, Gujarat
state.

Approx. Size

The land area is 1905 acres.

Land Use Pattern

Previously the land was served by Canal Network of Karjan Reservoir. Banana,
Sugarcane, Tuver are the major crops. The land is comparatively fertile.

Terrain Type

Part of the area falls under GIDC, Dahej and the terrain is highly undulating and
mainly consists of normal clayey soil and murrum.

Other Details

The Mega Industrial Centre (GIDC Jhagadia) lies on the Southeast of proposed
Power Plant. The proposed site is bounded by road to Jhagadia on the east.

Alternative Site-V (at Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar taluka, Bharuch
District)


The site located within the revenue limits of village Khanpur-Deh, Jambusar
taluka, Bharuch district, Gujarat state. Dhadhar River is located on the Southern
side of the said site. Khanpur Deh Village Site is located on the northeast side of
proposed project site. Khanpur Deh is located at 8 Km from Jambusar Taluka and
approx. 50Km from Bharuch.

Chapter-5

Approx. Size

The land area of is approx. 1900 acres.

Land Use Pattern

The land is barren in nature. It is basically government uncultivated land with no
development.

Terrain Type

The terrain is comparatively flat and mainly consists of saline type soil.

5.3.2 Evaluation of Potential Sites

The criteria for evaluating potential sites for implementing a gas based power
project are as follows:

Availability of sufficient land: Barren or Semi-fertile land, with minimum
resettlement preferred.
As per MOEF guidelines, no construction is allowed within 500 m from
state & national highways, railway lines and HFL/HTL of river/sea
The region shall not be environmentally fragile and not in vicinity (< 25
km) of any wildlife sanctuary or national park
Proximity to water source (seawater for coastal sites), Gas Trunk Pipeline
& Power Evacuation Infrastructure

5.3.3 Recommendation

Evaluation of Potential Sites - Comparative Statement:

The evaluation of the potential sites is given in Table-5.1.

Based on the above mentioned evaluation criteria, alternate site no - V, i.e.
Khanpur-Deh, Jambusar taluka, Bharuch district has been recommended to setup
the said project.

The major advantage in selecting the proposed Power Project may be summarized
below:

Proximity to NG trunk pipeline/LNG Terminal
Adequate barren land is available for the installation of the proposed Power
Plant with all facilities.
Proximity to sea/creek to use sea water
Gas/RLNG are cleaner and environment friendly fuels
To reduce the power shortage in the Gujarat State & Western Region
Site is well connected by Rail, Road and Air.
GoG has given consent for facilitating land, water and other infrastructure for
the project.

Chapter-5

TABLE-5.1
ALTERNATIVE SITES EVALUATION

Particualrs Alt. Site-I Alt. Site-II Alt. Site-III Alt. Site-IV Alt. Site-V Sr.
No. Name of Site Dahej Akhod Kaladara Kharchi Khanpur-Deh
1 Area (Acres) 1630 3380 2450 1905 1900
2 Cultivable land Less fertile Moderately fertile Fertile Fertile Barren Land
3 Land Acquisition It is away from Ex.
GIDC area but due
to agricultural
land use pattern
R&R issues
involved.
Acquisition is
comparatively
difficult
Portion of the land
is acquired by GIDC
but due to
agricultural land
use pattern R&R
issues involved.
Acquisition is
comparatively
difficult
At present no portion
of the land is
acquired or notified
by GIDC. but due to
agricultural land use
pattern R&R issues
involved. Acquisition
is difficult .
Due to agricultural
land use pattern
R&R issues
involved. Acquisition
is difficult
The entire land
is Govt. Barren
land
(uncultivated).
Permission
from State
Govt. is
required.
Acqusition will
not lead to
R&R issues as
well as use of
any agricultural
fertile land for
Power Plant
purpose.
4 Gas Pipeline
length (Km)
27(Ankot)
27(Bhadbhut)
17(Ankot)
16(Bhadbhut)
21(Ankot)
10(Bhadbhut)
37(Mangrol) 21(Ankot)
5 Sea Water
Pipeline length
(Km) approx
11 7 2.5 8 6

6 Elevation
(above MSL) m
4 to 5 8 6 27 5 to 6
7 Cultivable land Less fertile Moderately fertile Fertile Fertile Barren Land
8 Crop Pattern Cotton Cotton & Tuver Cotton Banana, Sugar
Cane, Tuver, Fertile
Barren land
9 Accessibility Easily accessible
by Bharuch-Dahej
SH and then
Dahej-Gandhar SH
Easily accessible by
Bharuch-Dahej SH
and then Rahiyad-
Vagra SH
Bharuch-Dahej SH
and then ODR to
Village-Kaladara
Bharuch-Jhagadia
SH or Ankleshwar-
Jhagadia SH and
then Approach Road
to Jhagadia GIDC
Existing road
(Bharuch -
Jambusar SH)
to the project
site needs to
strengthened
10 Infrastructure
Availabilities
All basic
infrastructure
facilities are
readily available
All basic
infrastructure
facilities are
moderately
available
All basic
infrastructure
facilities are readily
available
All basic
infrastructure
facilities are
moderately
available
Available
11 Narmada Project This area does not
fall under
command of
Narmada Canal
and its
distributory.
Minors and Sub-
minors of Narmada
project traverse
through this area
which needs to be
diverted.
This area does not
fall under command
of Narmada Canal
and its distributory.
Existing Karjan
Canal Network
served to this area
but at present is not
in use
This area does
not fall under
command of
Narmada Canal
and its
distributory.
12 Recommendation
s
Portion of the area
falls under ONGC
mining lease which
needs to be freed.
Agriculture land
with R&R issues
hence not
Recommended
Portion of the area
falls under ONGC
mining lease which
needs to be freed.
Agriculture land with
R&R issues hence
not
Recommended
Small portion of the
land on the NW
corner is occupied by
ONGC PEL.
Agriculture land with
R&R issues hence
not Recommended
Agriculture land
with R&R issues
hence not
recommended
The location is
most suitable
for power plant
and is the best
option.
Recommended

Environmental Monitoring Programme

6.0 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME

6.1 Introduction

An impact assessment study comprises two main phases:

Assessment of the present environmental condition,(Baseline)

Prediction of the impact of future development.

Regular monitoring programme of the environmental parameters is essential to
take into account the changes in the environment. The objectives of monitoring
are:

To verify the results of the impact assessment study in particular with regards
to new development;
To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;
To check or assess the efficiency of the controlling measures;
To ensure that new parameters, other than those identified in the impact
assessment study, do not become critical through the commissioning of new
installations;
To check assumption made with regard to the development and to detect
deviations in order to initiate necessary measures; and
To establish a data base for future Impact Assessment Studies for new projects.

The attributes, which merit regular monitoring, are specified underneath:

1) Air quality
2) Water and waste water quality
3) Noise levels
4) Ecological preservation and afforestation
5) Socioeconomic aspects

The post project monitoring to be carried out at the industry level is discussed in
following sections.

6.2 Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Regular monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters is of
immense importance to assess the status of environment during plant operation.
With the knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring programme can serve as
an indicator for any deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of
the plant and suitable mitigatory steps could be taken in time to safeguard the
environment. Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since the
efficacy of control measures can only be determined by monitoring.

The monitoring program would be a comprehensive monitoring programme as
suggested underneath. Environmental attributes should be monitored as given
below:


Air Pollution and Meteorological Aspects

Both ambient air quality and stack emissions shall be monitored. It is proposed to
undertake continuous monitoring of NOx emissions, and the ambient air shall be
monitored twice in a week [in line with the guidelines of CPCB] at four locations. An
auto meteorological station shall be utilized at the plant site to monitor met data
continuously.

Water and Wastewater Quality

All the effluents emanating from the plant should be monitored monthly for
physicochemical characteristics. Heavy metals would be monitored on a quarterly
basis. Temperature of the hot water discharge should be monitored on hourly basis
daily. Similarly, the temperature at the discharge point in the drain should be
monitored on fortnightly basis. It is proposed to monitor the physical and chemical
parameters in the effluents as per Table-6.1.

Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment such as GT building, ST building, Turbo
generator and compressors shall be monitored. The frequency shall be once in
three months in the work zone. Similarly, ambient noise levels at three locations
shall be monitored on a seasonal basis.

The environmental monitoring cell shall coordinate all monitoring programmes at
site and data thus generated shall be regularly furnished to the State regulatory
agencies.

TABLE-6.1
MONITORING SCHEDULE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

Sr.
No.
Particulars Monitoring
Frequency
Duration of
Sampling
Important
Monitoring
Parameters
1. Air Pollution & Meteorology
Air Quality
A Stack Monitoring
1 Boiler Stacks On Line Continuous NOx
B Ambient Air Quality Monitoring
Four locations specified by
the Gujarat PCB
Twice in a
week
24 hours
continuously
Suspended
particulate matter,
RPM, SO2, NOx, CO
1a. Meteorology
a Meteorological data to be
monitored at the proposed
plant
Daily Continuous
Monitoring
Wind speed &
direction,
temperature, relative
humidity, rainfall.
2. Water and Wastewater Quality
a. Industrial/Domestic
1 Once in a
week
All parameters as per
EPA Rules, 1986

Central Effluent Holding
Pond
daily
24 hour
composite
pH, TDS, BOD,
Temperature
b. Water quality in the study area:

Sr.
No.
Particulars Monitoring
Frequency
Duration of
Sampling
Important
Monitoring
Parameters
the Gujarat PCB
Once in a
month
Grab sample As per IS:2296 and
IS:10500 as
applicable
3. Industrial Noise Levels
1 Near administrative office Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
Noise levels in dB(A)
2 Gas Turbine Building Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
3 Steam Turbine Building Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
4 Transformer yard Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
5 Cooling water pump house Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
6 Compressors Once in three
months

8 hr
continuous
with one hour
interval
Ambient Noise Levels
the Gujarat PCB
Seasonal 24 hours
continuous
with one hour
interval

6.3 Infrastructure for Environmental Protection

In the plant the infrastructure facility for environmental protection shall be
established. This cell shall be led by Environmental Manager and supported by
chemist, Horticulturist and required junior staff. This environmental cell shall have
well equipped laboratory to carry analysis of water and air parameters. An
Environmental Committee shall be formed to periodically monitor the status.

6.3.1 Monitoring Equipment and Consumables

a) Air Quality and Meteorology

The sampling shall be done as per the standard procedures laid down by IS:2488.
Following equipments are required for water sampling and analysis:

High Volume Sampler
Stack monitoring equipment (on line)
Weather station (Continuous)
Spectrophotometer (visible range)

Single pan balance
Relevant chemicals as per IS:5182
CO monitor

b) Water and Wastewater Quality

The sampling shall be done as per the standard procedures laid down by IS:2488.
Following equipment should be procured:

BOD incubator
COD reflux set up
Refrigerator
Oven
Stop watch
Thermometer
pH meter
Distilled water plant
Pipette box
Titration set
Dissolved Oxygen analyzer
Relevant chemicals

c) Noise Levels

The industry should purchase a sound level meter to record noise levels in different
scales like A weighting with slow and fast response options.

The source of funds for these measures shall be the same as included in the total
project cost. The expenses during project operation in the area of environmental
protection shall be earmarked accordingly.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.0 ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 Risk Assessment

In the Jambusar CCPP proposed power plant of 7200 MW it is proposed to achieve
the capacity by installation of 9 modules of 800MW capacity, each. The maximum
daily requirement of natural gas or R-LNG is 28 MMSCMD. It is also envisaged to
use HSD as emergency fuel during non availability of the Natural gas/RLNG for a
maximum period of 3 days in a year. In the proposed gas based power plant, only
HSD is proposed as a stand by fuel. Hence, the risk assessment has been carried
out for both Natural Gas/ R-LNG and HSD storage tanks.

HSD will be stored as an emergency fuel in storage tanks of about 15 x 7500 KL
capacity. Natural gas will be supplied by proposed gas pipeline route of KGD basin
of Reliance Industries Limited (RIL) and RLNG supply by Dahej /Hazira LNG
Terminal. Fuel will be received through pipeline to the plant.

Hazard analysis involves the identification and quantification of the various
hazards (unsafe conditions) that exist in the proposed plant operations. On the
other hand, risk analysis deals with the recognition and computation of risks, the
equipment in the plant and personnel are prone to, due to accidents resulting
from the hazards present in the plant.

Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. It involves the identification and
assessment of risks the neighboring populations are exposed to as a result of
hazards present. This requires a thorough knowledge of failure probability, credible
accident scenario, vulnerability of population etc. The risk analysis is often confined
to maximum credible accident studies.

In the sections below, the identification of various hazards, probable risks in the
proposed project, maximum credible accident analysis, consequence analysis are
addressed which gives a broad identification of risks involved in the plant.

7.2 Approach to Risk Assessment Study

Risk involves the occurrence or potential occurrence of some accidents consisting of
an event or sequence of events. The risk assessment study covers the following:

1. Hazard Identification

Identification of potential hazard areas;

2. Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

Identification of representative failure cases;
Visualization of the resulting scenarios in terms of fire (thermal radiation) and
explosion;
Assess the overall damage potential of the identified hazardous events and the
impact zones from the accidental scenarios;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Assess the overall suitability of the site from hazard minimization and disaster
mitigation point of view;
3. Disaster Management and Emergency Preparedness Plan

Furnish specific recommendations on the minimization of the worst accident
possibilities; and
Preparation of broad DMP, Onsite and Offsite Emergency Plan, which includes
Occupational and Health Safety Plan.

7.3 Hazard Identification

Identification of hazards in the proposed project is of primary significance in the
analysis, quantification and cost effective control of accidents involving chemicals
and process. A classical definition of hazard states that hazard is in fact the
characteristic of system/plant/process that presents potential for an accident.
Hence, all the components of a system/plant/process need to be thoroughly
examined to assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned
event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an accident. The following two
methods for hazard identification have been employed in the study:

Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and
Import of Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (GOI Rules,
1989); and

Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage units based
on relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).

7.3.1 Classification of Major Hazardous Units

Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes; namely flammable
substances, unstable substances and toxic substances. The ratings for a large
number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity and toxicity have been given
in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M. The major hazardous materials to be stored,
transported, handled and utilized within the facility are:

Natural Gas/ R-LNG
HSD
Chlorine

The fuel storage details and properties are given in Table-7.1 and Table-7.2.
There will not be any static storage of natural gas within the plant premises. The
storage of natural gas at project site is not envisaged and will be supplied
continuously through pipeline.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies

TABLE-7.1
CATEGORY WISE SCHEDULE OF STORAGE TANKS

Sr. No. Material No. of
Tanks
Design Capacity Classification
1 Natural Gas/
RLNG
Not applicable as storage of gas is not required
2 HSD 15 7500 KL (each) Class A Petroleum
3 Chlorine 12 1 tonne Non-Flammable Class-2

TABLE-7.2
PROPERTIES OF FUELS USED IN THE PLANT

FBP MP FP UEL LEL Chemical Codes/Label TLV
C %
Natural Gas/
RLNG
Flammable Gas - -212.7 - - 22.2 7.3
HSD Flammable Liquid 5 mg/m
3
400 - l44 7.5 0.6
Chlorine Non-Flammable 1 ppm -34.0 -101.0 - - -

TLV : Threshold Limit Value FBP : Final Boiling Point
MP : Melting Point FP : Flash Point
UEL : Upper Explosive Limit LEL : Lower Explosive Limit

7.4 Hazard Assessment and Evaluation

7.4.1 Methodology

An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose of identifying
and examining hazards related to feed stock materials, major process components,
utility and support systems, environmental factors, proposed operations, facilities,
and safeguards.

7.4.2 Preliminary Hazard Analysis (PHA)

A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out initially to identify the major hazards
associated with storages and the processes of the plant. This is followed by
consequence analysis to quantify these hazards. Finally, the vulnerable zones are
plotted for which risk reducing measures are deduced and implemented. Preliminary
hazard analysis for the process and storage areas and entire plant is given in Table-
7.3 and Table-7.4.

TABLE-7.3
PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR PROCESS AND STORAGE AREAS

Equipment Process Potential Hazard Provision
Turbine Converts pressure in the flue
gas into mechanical energy.
Mechanical and fire
hazards.
Layout of
equipment/machinery is
done in accordance to
factory and electrical
inspectorate.
Generator Converts mechanical energy Mechanical hazards and As above
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Equipment Process Potential Hazard Provision
into electrical energy. fire hazards in
1. Lube oil system
2. Cable galleries
3. Short circuits
Power
Transformers
- Fire and explosion All electrical fittings and
cables are provided as
per the specified
standards.
Switch Yard 400 KVA switch yard Fire As above
Switch Yard
control room
- Fire in cable galleries
and switch
As above
Natural Gas
pipeline
Transportation of Natural
Gas to combustor
Fire and explosion Leaks detection system
and extinguishers will be
provided.
HSD Storage Fire and explosion Leaks detection system
and extinguishers will be
provided.
Chlorine Used for water treatment in
different phases in cooling
water, potable water and
raw water.
Toxic release Leak detection and
extinguishers will be
carried out regularly.

TABLE-7.4
PRELIMINARY HAZARD ANALYSIS FOR THE WHOLE PLANT IN GENERAL

PHA
Category
Description of
Plausible Hazard
Recommendation Provision
Environmental
factors
If there is any
leakage and
eventuality of
source of ignition.
-- All electrical fittings and
cables will be provided as per
the specified standards. All
motor starters are flame
proof.
Environmental
factors
Highly inflammable
nature of the liquid
fuels may cause
fire hazard in the
storage facility.
A well designed fire
protection including foam,
dry powder, and CO2
extinguisher should be
provided.
Fire extinguisher of small size
and big size are provided at
all potential fire hazard
places. In addition to the
above, fire hydrant network
is also provided.

7.4.3 Fire Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI) Approach

Fire, Explosion and Toxicity Indexing (FE & TI) is a rapid ranking method for
identifying the degree of hazard. The application of FE & TI would help to make a
quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the hazard in these areas.
However, this does not provide precise information.

The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&EI as
per the criteria given below:

Sr. No. F&EI Range Degree of Hazard
1 0-60 Light
2 61-96 Moderate
3 97-127 Intermediate
4 128-158 Heavy
5 159 and above Severe
By comparing the indices F&EI and TI, the unit in question is classified into one of
the following three categories established for the purpose (Table-7.5).
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

TABLE-7.5
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Category Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) Toxicity Index (TI)
I F&EI < 65 TI < 6
II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10
III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10

Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are recommended for
the three hazard categories.

7.4.3.1 Results of FE and TI for Storage/Process Units

Based on the GOI Rules 1989, the hazardous fuels used by the proposed project
were identified. Fire and Explosion are the likely hazards, which may occur due to
the fuel storage. Hence, Fire and Explosion index has been calculated for in plant
storage. Estimates of FE&TI are given in Table-7.6.

TABLE-7.6
FIRE EXPLOSION AND TOXICITY INDEX

Sr. No. Chemical/ Fuel Total Capacity F&EI Category TI Category
1 Natural Gas/
RLNG
Pipeline - - - -
2 HSD 15 x 7500 KL 70.3 Moderate Nil -
3 Chlorine 12 x 1 tonne 5.2 light 10 II

7.4.4 Maximum Credible Accident Analysis (MCAA)

Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catastrophes,
causing possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the
question of how the consequences of the release of such substances and the
damage to the surrounding area can be determined by means of models. Major
hazards posed by flammable storage can be identified taking recourse to MCA
analysis. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the hazards and
calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiation,
toxic releases, vapour cloud explosion etc. A host of probable or potential accidents
of the major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling of the
hazardous materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon the
effective hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect
on the surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be
assessed. The reason and purpose of consequence analysis are many folds like:

Part of Risk Assessment;
Plant Layout/Code Requirements;
Protection of other plants;
Protection of the public;
Emergency Planning; and
Design Criteria.

The results of consequence analysis are useful for getting information about all
known and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

occurs in the plant and also to get information as how to deal with the possible
catastrophic events. It also gives the workers in the plant and people living in the
vicinity of the area, an understanding of their personal situation.

7.4.4.1 Damage Criteria

The fuel storage and unloading at the storage facility may lead to fire and explosion
hazards. The damage criteria due to an accidental release of any hydrocarbon arise
from fire and explosion. The vapors of these fuels are not toxic and hence no effects
of toxicity are expected.

Tank fire would occur if the radiation intensity is high on the peripheral surface of
the tank leading to increase in internal tank pressure. Pool fire would occur when
fuels collected in the dyke due to leakage gets ignited.

Fire Damage (Pool Fire)

A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffusion flame. This
releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate of the liquid. A
part of the heat is radiated while the rest is convected away by rising hot air and
combustion products. The radiations can heat the contents of a nearby storage or
process unit to above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire.

The radiations can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire fighters
located within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know beforehand the
damage potential of a flammable liquid pool likely to be created due to leakage or
catastrophic failure of a storage or process vessel. This will help to decide the
location of other storage/process vessels, decide the type of protective clothing the
workers/fire fighters, the duration of time for which they can be in the zone, the fire
extinguishing measures needed and the protection methods needed for the nearby
storage/process vessels.

The damage effect on equipment and people due to thermal radiation intensity is
given in Table-7.7. Similarly, the effect of incident radiation intensity and exposure
time on lethality is given in Table-7.8.

TABLE-7.7
DAMAGE DUE TO INCIDENT RADIATION INTENSITIES

Type of Damage Intensity Sr.
No.
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m
2
)
Damage to Equipment Damage to People
1 37.5 Damage to process equipment 100% lethality in 1 min.
1% lethality in 10 sec.
2 25.0 Minimum energy required to
ignite wood at indefinitely long
exposure without a flame
50% Lethality in 1 min.
Significant injury in 10
sec.

3 19.0 Maximum thermal radiation
intensity allowed on thermally
unprotected adjoining equipment
-
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Type of Damage Intensity Sr.
No.
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m
2
)
Damage to Equipment Damage to People
4 12.5 Minimum energy to ignite with a
flame; melts plastic tubing
1% lethality in 1 min.
5 4.5 - Causes pain if duration is
longer than 20 sec,
however blistering is un-
likely (First degree burns)
6 1.6 - Causes no discomfort on
long exposures
Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank

TABLE-7.8
RADIATION EXPOSURE AND LETHALITY

Radiation
Intensity
(kW/m
2
)
Exposure Time
(seconds)
Lethality (%) Degree of Burns
1.6 - 0 No Discomfort even after
long exposure
4.5 20 0 1
st

4.5 50 0 1
st

8.0 20 0 1
st

8.0 50 <1 3
rd

8.0 60 <1 3
rd

12.0 20 <1 2
nd

12.0 50 8 3
rd

12.5 - 1 -
25.0 - 50 -
37.5 - 100 -

Damage Due to Explosion

Explosion is a sudden and violent release of energy accompanied by the generation
of pressure wave and a loud noise. The rate of energy release is very large and has
potential to cause injury to the people, damage the plant and nearby property etc.
The effect of over pressure can directly result in deaths to those working in the
immediate vicinity of the explosion. The pressure wave may be caused by a Boiling
Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosion (BLEVE).

BLEVE - Fireball

BLEVE is sometimes referred to as a fireball. A BLEVE is a combination of fire and
explosion with an intense radiant heat emission within a relatively short time
interval. This phenomenon can occur as a result of overheating of a pressurized
vessel by a primary fire. If a pressure vessel fails as a result of a weakening of its
structure the contents are instantaneously released from the vessel as a turbulent
mixture of liquid and gas expanding rapidly and dispersing in air as a cloud. When
this cloud is ignited a fireball occur causing enormous heat radiation intensity within
a few seconds. This heat intensity is sufficient to cause severe skin burns and
deaths at several hundred meters from the vessel, depending on the quantity of gas
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

involved. A BLEVE can therefore be caused by a physical impact on a vessel or a
tank, which is already overstressed.

7.4.5 Scenarios Considered for MCA Analysis

7.4.5.1 Fuel Storage

Gas is the primary fuel for the proposed Power Plant. The details of storages in the
proposed project are given Table-7.9 and Table-7.10. In case of fuel released in
the area catching fire, a steady state fire will occur. Failures in pipeline may occur
due to corrosion and mechanical defect. Failure of pipeline due to external
interference is not considered as this area is licensed area and all the work within
this area is closely supervised with trained personnel.

TABLE-7.9
SCENARIOS CONSIDERED FOR MCA ANALYSIS

Sr. No. Fuel/Chemical Total Quantity Scenarios considered
1 Full bore rupture of gas pipeline
at GRS
-- Pool fire/fire ball
2 Failure of HSD tanks
a Failure of 1 HSD tank 1 x 7500 KL Pool fire
b Failure of all HSD tanks 15 x 7500 KL Pool fire
3 Chlorine Cylinder Failure
a Continuous release 12 x 1 tonne Toxic
b Instantaneous 12 x 1 tonne Toxic

TABLE-7.10
Details of NG/RLNG System

Technical Particulars Design parameter
Quantity 28 mmscmd
Main header diameter 600mm NB
Supply pressure 45kg/cm
2

Size of pipeline to individual GT 300mm NB

7.4.5.2 Modeling Scenarios

Based on the storage and consumption of various fuels the following failure
scenarios for the proposed project have been identified for MCA analysis and the
scenarios are discussed. The fuel properties considered in modeling are given in
Table-7.11.
TABLE-7.11
PROPERTIES OF FUELS CONSIDERED FOR MODELING

Sr.
No.
Fuel Molecular weight
(kg/kg mol)
Boiling Point
( C)
Density
(kg/m
3
)
1 Natural
gas/RLNG
21.40 258 0.95
2 HSD 114.24 400 880

Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.4.5.3 Methodology

Fires could occur due to presence of ignition source at or near the source of spill
or could occur due to flashback upon ignition of the traveling vapor cloud.

For the present study, the scenarios under consideration assume that the peak
level of radiation intensity will not occur suddenly. Based on the past experience,
it is found that 20-30 minutes time will be required before a tank fire grows to full
size. For radiation calculations, pool fire has been considered. From the above
considerations, the criteria of 4.5 kW/m
2
have been selected to judge
acceptability of the scenarios. The assumptions for calculations are:

It is not continuous exposure;
It is assumed that no fire detection and mitigation measures are initiated;
There is not enough time available for warning the public and initiating
emergency action;
Secondary fire at public road and building is not likely to happen;
The effect of smoke on reduction of source radiation intensity has not been
considered; and
Shielding effect of intervening trees or other structures has not been
considered. No lethality is expected from this level of intensity although burn
injury takes place depending on time of exposure.

Based on the above assumptions the pipeline carrying NG has been assessed with
respect to Pool fire and fireball scenarios. The following assumptions are made for
evaluating the risk on the storage facilities and personnel due to the failure
scenarios.

7.4.5.4 Details of Models Used for MCA Analysis

Pool Fire Model

Heat Radiation program RADN has been used to estimate the steady state
radiation effect from various storage of fuel and chemicals at different distances.
The model is based on World Bank guidelines. The model takes into account the
following parameters to compute radiation zones.

The Rate of Burning;
The Pool Size;
The Emissive Power of the Flame; and
The Heat received at a Particular Location.

7.4.6 Results and Discussion

1. Fireball Due to Pumping of Natural Gas to Gas Turbine

The results of MCA analysis are tabulated indicating the distances for various
damages identified by the damage criteria. Calculations are done for radiation
intensities levels of 37.5, 25, 19, 12.5, and 4.5 kW/m
2
, which are presented in
Table-7.12. The distances computed for various scenarios are given in meters
and are from the center of the pool.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

TABLE-7.12
OCCURRENCE OF VARIOUS RADIATION INTENSITIES (FIRE BALL)

Pool
Radius
Time Radiation Intensities (kW/m
2
) Radiation
and Effect
(m) (min) 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 4.5
Distances (m)
10 min - 8.16 34.8 42.6 48.8 60.2 100.3
60 min - 14.8 63.2 77.3 88.7 109.4 182.3

The hazard distance for BLEVE-Fireball of LNG pipeline is tabulated above.

Based on the hourly requirement of LNG for each gas turbine at full load the
pumping rate for 10 minutes and one hour have been estimated for GT Building.
It is assumed that during pumping of fuel into gas turbine and in the event of
failure of pipeline or pumps, gas or vapour escapes into the atmosphere, meets
an ignition source and develops into a fireball and exits as a vapor cloud
explosion. Based on the pumping rates two scenarios viz. 10 min and 60 min
have been considered for MCA analysis. This type of fires or explosion would be
confined within the building.

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m
2
(100% lethality)
and 25.0 kW/m
2
(50% lethality) occurs at 34.8 m and 42.6 m in case of 10-min
release and 63.2 m and 77.3 m in case of 60-min release respectively from the
center of the fireball.

The threshold limit for 1% lethality is 12.5 kW/m
2
. From the results, it can be
inferred that this vulnerable zone occurs at 60.2 m in case of 10-min release and
109.4 m in case of 60-min release from center of the fireball. Similarly, the
threshold limit for first degree burns is 4.5 kW/m
2
. From the results, it can be
seen that this vulnerable zone occurs at 100.3 m for 10-min release and 182.3 m
in case of 60-min release from the center of the fireball.

2. Risk Assessment due to HSD Storage in Plant Premises

The storage of HSD at plant premises involves identification of thermal radiation
zones around the storage tanks in the unlikely event of leakage causing fire.

The results of MCA analysis are tabulated indicating the distances for various
damages identified by the damage criteria, as explained earlier. Calculations are
done for radiation intensities levels of 37.5, 25, 12.5, 4.5 and 1.6 kW/m
2
, which are
presented in Table-7.13 for different scenarios. The distances computed for various
scenarios are from the center of the pool fire. The damage contours are shown in
Figure-7.1 and Figure-7.2.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies

TABLE-7.13
OCCURRENCE OF VARIOUS RADIATION INTENSITIES- POOL FIRE

Radiation Intensities (kW/m
2
)/
Distances (m)
Radiation and Effect Total
capacity
(KL) 37.5 25.0 19.0 12.5 4.5 1.6
HSD
Failure of one tank 7500 18.5 25.6 29.1 35.4 58.1 89.4
Failure of fifteen tanks 15 x 7500 118.4 161.2 182.3 216.5 321.8 481.2

The maximum capacity of storage of HSD in each tank will be 7500 KL. The most
credible failure is the rupture of the largest pipe connecting to the storage tank.
As the worst case, it is assumed that the entire contents leak out into the dyke
forming a pool, which may catch fire on finding a source of ignition.

Pool Fire Due to Failure of HSD Storage Tanks

A perusal of the above table clearly indicates that 37.5 kW/m
2
(100% lethality)
occurs for HSD tanks within the radius of the pool which is computed at 18.5 m
tank on pool fire. This vulnerable zone will damage all fuel storage equipment
falling within the pool radius. Similarly, the threshold limit for first degree burns is
1.6 kW/m
2
, this vulnerable zone in which the thermal fluxes above the threshold
limit for first degree occurs at a distance of 481.2 m in case fifteen HSD tanks are
on pool fire.

7.4.7 Conclusions on Pool Fire Modeling

The radiation intensities of 37.5 kW/m
2
and 25.0 kW/m
2
represents 100% and
50% lethality on people and complete damage to the process equipment and
minimum energy required to ignite wood (without a flame) and melting of plastic.
The equipment and the personnel falling within the distance computed for 37.5
kW/m
2
would be damaged and 100% fatality is likely to occur, which in turn
depends on the number of people working within this vulnerable distance at that
particular time.

In case of failure of gas pipeline, the radiation counter for 4.5 kw/m2 falls within
the plant boundary. However, process activities and steam turbine, gas turbine
and other equipments fall within this radiation counter. The proper safety and
control measures will be adopted to prevent the failure of the pipeline feeding Gas
Turbines.

There will be fifteen HSD storage tanks each of 7500 m
3
capacity will be provided
in the HSD tank farm. The results of MCA analysis indicate that the maximum
damage distances for 12.5 Kw/m
2
thermal radiations extends upto 216.5 m in the
case of fifteen full tanks of 7500 m
3
on fire during worst meteorological
conditions. As the fire resistant dyke walls will be created, no cumulative effect of
one tank form on fire to create fire on other tank farm is envisaged.

A perusal of modeling results tabulated above for all the scenarios indicate that the
radiation intensity of 37.5 kW/m
2
is likely to occur within a distance (range) of 18.5
m to 118.4 m. These distances fall within the computed pool radius for each
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

scenario. About 100% lethality and complete damage to the equipment is likely to
occur within these distances.

Similarly, the distances computed for radiation intensity of 25.0 kW/m
2
fall in range
of 25.6 m to 161.2 m for all scenarios. In all the cases the distances occur within
the pool radius. About 50% lethality and partial damage depending on the type of
equipment is likely to occur within these distances.

The radiation intensity of 12.5 kW/m
2
represents 1% lethality on people and
minimum energy required to ignite wood (with a flame) and melting of plastic. The
equipment and the personal falling within the distance computed for 12.5 kW/m
2

would be partially damaged and 1% lethality is likely to occur, which in turn
depends on the number of people working within this vulnerable distance at that
particular time.

A perusal of modeling results tabulated above for all the scenarios indicate that the
radiation intensity of 12.5 kW/m
2
is likely to occur within a distance (range) of 35.4
m to 216.5 m. About 1% lethality and partial damage depending on the type of
equipment is likely to occur within these distances.

Similarly, the radiation intensity of 4.5 kW/m
2
represents first degree burns on
people and has no effect on the equipment. The equipment and the personal falling
within the distance computed for 4.5 kW/m
2
would experience first degree burns,
and in turn depends on the number of people working within this vulnerable
distance at that particular time.

In case of HSD the radiation intensity of 4.5 kW/m
2
is likely to occur within a
distance (range) of 58.1 m to 321.8 m. However, these intensities are contained
within the plant boundary.

In case of pool fire of HSD tanks the distance of occurrence of 12.5 kW/m
2
of
radiation intensity which causes 1% lethality in 1 minute is observed to be low and
is expected to be contained within the boundary of the plant (plant boundary is
located at about 400 m from the storage dyke).

As the tanks are provided with dyke the fire would be confined within the dyke
wall. The frequency of such a bund fire, taking place is very low and is of the order
of 1 in 2000 to 4000 years for one tank rupture. It may be noted that the
occurrence of pool fire is rather rare but such data/discussions are useful for
emergency planning. There will be adequate time to evoke emergency planning
and evacuate people by the time a small fire in tank area can grow into a full
fledge bund fire.

Chapter-7
Additional Studies


FIGURE-7.1
DAMAGE CONTOUR FOR ONE HSD TANK ON FIRE
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
cooc.no :owts.-ov- oost
-
:
.
o
v

-
c
/
n
:

s

t
:
-
w
/
t
-
o
o
s
t
c
/
c
o
o

c
o
c
o
n
\
P
U
M
P

H
O
U
S
E
t
-
-
c
o
t
n
:
o
.
s
c
o
t
s
t
/

w
/
:t
.n
:
/
s
t

-
.-
t
c.n
t
ots/c.n/:.on -c/n:
1.6 kW/m
4.5 kW/m
2
12.5 kW/m
2
37.5 kW/m
2
2
Chapter-7
Additional Studies


FIGURE-7.2
DAMAGE CONTOUR FOR FIFTEEN HSD TANKS ON FIRE
D
H
A
D
H
A
R
R
I
V
E
R
cooc.no :owts.-ov- oost
-
:
.
o
v

-
c
/
n
:

s

t
:
-
c
/
c
o
o

c
o
c
o
n
\
t
-
-
c
o
t
n
:
o
.
s
c
o
t
ots/c.n/:.on -c/n:
12.5 kW/m
19.0 kW/m
2
25.0 kW/m
2
37.5 kW/m
2
2
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.5 Risk Analysis due to Chlorine Handling

The chlorination plant is provided for chlorine dosing in the CW system to prevent
microbiological growth. Chlorine from tonners is dissolved in water by means of
vacuum feed type evaporator-chlorinator sets. Leakage of chlorine may occur
due to many reasons. A few situations could be:

Failure of pipeline and/or equipment (e.g. corrosion, fatigue erosion of pipes
etc.) used for transfer of liquid chlorine;
Accident while handling chlorine tonners by crane;
Breaking of nozzle discharging the contents into the atmosphere as a stream;
Rupturing of the shell discharging the entire contents into the atmosphere
instantaneously; and
Operator errors.

The probable scenario is a one tonne tonner leaking as if releasing liquid chlorine
at full throw through an open valve or rupture of nozzle. The second scenario
may be of shell rupture and the entire contents may be discharged into
atmosphere instantaneously. The first mode of failure is more probable than the
second.

Nevertheless, these failure modes are considered as possible for the consequence
analysis. The critical concentration for Chlorine in air is given in Table-7.14.

TABLE-7.14
CRITICAL CONCENTRATIONS FOR CHLORINE

Sr. No. Criteria Concentrations
1 Lethal for 50% of active healthy people in case of 30
minute exposure. Inside the building, the concentrations
may be more than 300 ppm and may be fatal after a few
breaths
140 ppm or more
2 Fatal for more vulnerable people and dangerous for all >60 to <140 ppm
3 Dangerous-Immediate irritation of nose, throat and eyes
with cough and lachrymation
15-60 pm

7.5.1 Rupture of Nozzle

When the nozzle ruptures, which represents the worst case for this failure, the
sequence of events are as follows:

Pressurized liquid discharge from the nozzle;
Two phase expansion and equalization of chlorine resulting in rain out of liquid
and vapour;
Liquid pool formation; and
Continuous release of chlorine resulting in vapour cloud formation.

The spread of cloud of chlorine formed by leakage on ground would be time
dependent on the wind direction and its spread. A computer model ÀLOHA' gives
spread of chlorine and its concentrations for different discharge rates of Chlorine
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

in kg/min for continuous release. The details of model input data is presented
below in the following sections.

The rate of release of chlorine from the nozzle varies with time and is dependent
on the initial pressure and temperature of the cylinder. For a one tonne cylinder
of a net 900 kg liquefied chlorine at 30
o
C and 6.3 atm initial pressures, from a 2.5
cm diameter nozzle, the rate of release will be 209 kg/max for 2 tonners.

Input data considered for Estimates

The details of model input data is presented below in the following sections:

The model was run for different scenarios of Chlorine storage:

Continuous leakage (1 and 2 tonners of Chlorine);
Instantaneous rupture (2 tonners of Chlorine)

Meteorological Data

Temperature (
o
C): 37.2
Wind direction: 225
Wind speed (m/s): 4.1
Ground Condition (wet/dry): Dry
Stability Class: E

Details of Source

Height of leak above ground: 1.5m
Emission Rate (kg/min): 164 for 1 tonner
Total time of release (min): 10.0

Emission Rate (kg/min): 209 for 2 tonner
Total time of release (min): 16.0

7.5.2 Results and Discussion

Scenario-I

The predicted hazard distances for 1 tonner and 2 tonners release of Chlorine are
given in Table-7.15.

TABLE-7.15
DISPERSION RESULTS FOR CHLORINE RELEASE - NOZZLE RUPTURE

Distance/Direction from Source of release of Chlorine
(m)
Sr.
No.
Criteria
1 Ton 2 Ton Direction
1 140 ppm 292 358 NE
2 60 ppm 467 611 NE
3 15 ppm 705 866 NE
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Scenario-II

In case of an explosion in the chlorination plant, as a worst case, all the tonners
(12 Nos) may be involved and get ruptured, releasing about 12 x 0.9 tonnes of
liquid chlorine simultaneously.

For 12 tonners simultaneous rupture, the release of chlorine spread and the
distances are given in Table-7.16.

TABLE-7.16
AREA LIKELY TO BE AFFECTED DUE TO THE RELEASE OF CHLORINE
(INSTANTANEOUS SPILL)

Sr.
No.
Criteria Distance from source (m) Settlements Likely to be
affected
1 140 ppm 2071 Nil
2 60 ppm 3511 Nil
3 15 ppm 5264 Nil

It may be observed that the Chlorine may spread over a large area of plant
depending mainly on wind direction. Actual direction and the likely affected area
will depend on the prevailing wind direction and speed at the time of accident.

7.5.3 Emergency Preparedness Plan Relating to Chlorine Leakage

Emergency Procedure

1. Identifying Leaks

Presence of chlorine in the atmosphere even in very low concentrations can be
easily detected by its pungent smell. In order to ascertain the exact location of
the leak, an ammonia torch is generally used. This consists of a stick with a cloth
bulb at one end. Soak the cloth bulb with aqua ammonia and hold it close to the
area of suspected leak. A white cloud indicates chlorine leakage and the source
thereof. Care should be taken to avoid contact of ammonia with any brass parts.

2. Preliminary Measures in Facing Leakage

As soon as there is any indication of Chlorine leakage immediate steps should be
taken to meet the situation. The first step to be taken when a Chlorine leak
occurs is to remove all persons not directly concerned, from the area affected.
Only trained personnel equipped with suitable gas masks and emergency kits
should investigate the leakage and take appropriate action. No person should be
alone on a Chlorine leakage. If leak is extensive, all persons in the path of fumes
must be immediately warned to leave the area and proceed upwind of the leak
and to a higher plane in the open. Chlorine gas is approximately 2 & 1/2 times as
heavy as air and therefore it usually accumulates close to the ground.

Water should never be used on a chlorine leak. Chlorine is only slightly soluble in
water, and as such will not dissolve the gas. On the other hand, the combined
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

corrosive action of water and Chlorine will always make the leak worse.

If the leakage is from the process system, supply of chlorine to the line must be
immediately cut off. If a Chlorine container is leaking the first step to be taken is
to ensure that only gas, instead of liquid escapes. This is because the quantity of
Chlorine that escapes in form of a gas leak is only about 1 & 1/5
th
of what would
escape from a liquid leak through a hole of the same size. If the container is
connected to process, it should be immediately disconnected. Turn the container
in such a way as to keep the leak at the top level so that only gas escapes. In
case of a valve leak in tonner, the tonner should be rolled, so that the valves are
in vertical plane with the leaking valve above. If the leakage is heavy, it may be
desirable to remove the container to an isolated spot. Chlorine leakages can be
controlled with trained personnel, suitably equipped with safety appliances and
emergency kits.

However, after controlling the leakage, Chlorine should be used in the process
itself and should be neutralized. It is not safe to store a container for long
periods, once it has developed a leak although it is temporarily controlled.

3. Valve Leaks

Leakages from the valve are the most common type encountered in handling
Chlorine containers. There are basically 4 types of valve leaks, and these can be
adequately controlled with the use of emergency kits.

a. Leak from valve - Tightening the packing nut with a spanner should control
the leakage
b. Leak from valve - This happens due to the valve not seat or spindle closing
properly. Gently open the close the valve to remove any scales. If this fails
remove the outlet cap, insert a gasket and refit the outlet cap with a spanner
c. Leak due to the threads might either be worn out defective inlet or broken.
Tighten the valve threads carefully in the container applying steady pressure
with a spanner. If this fails, do not try to repair the valve, but control the
outflow of Chlorine through the use of the valve hood.
d. Broken valve - Outflow of Chlorine gas should be controlled through the use of
a valve hood.

4. Container Wall Leaks

Use of chain and Yoke Arrangement for Tonner Wall Leaks

a. Keep the tonner on two wooden planks in such a way that the leaking point is
on top
b. Fix the cap screw in the yoke in such a way that a small portion of the screw
goes into the yoke.
c. Attach one end of the chain to one side of the yoke. Pass the other end of the
chain under tonner, and pull it through to the other side.
d. Position the top cap screw in the yoke in the depression of the steel plate
patch.
e. Attach the free end of chain to the other side of the yoke.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

f. Place the gasket and steel place patch centrally on the leak and the yoke,
over it.
g. Now tighten the cap screw slowly and steadily which will in turn, tighten the
chain, giving a leak free sealing (if it is found that the wall of tonner loss
weakening by tightening the screw do not apply further pressure)
h. Check for leak around the steel patch. If gas still escapes tighten the cap
screw further, until he leak stops.

Note: Use of wooden Pegs. In case the above gadgets are not immediately available, then
the leak could be temporarily sealed by inserting a wooden peg with the hammer, inside
the leaking hole.

Disposal of Chlorine

After stopping the leak, important task is to dispose off the chlorine remaining in
the Cylinder/tonner. If possible the remaining chlorine should be immediately
used in process. This should be done by connecting hood. If process doesn't
permit more consumption of remaining chlorine, it may be passed in the solution
of dilute caustic soda or soda ash.

Emergency Management In case of Fire

Chlorine by itself is non-inflammable, but supports combustion under certain
conditions. If this occurs in the chlorine storage area, following two alternatives are
applicable:

1. The containers have to be moved out. provided no chlorine is leaking,
2. In case of leakage, aqua ammonia should be sprayed on the cylinder and
fire need to be contained immediately

First Aid Measures

In all first aid measures, the speed with which they are taken is of utmost
importance. All persons connected with any sphere of activity involving storage or
use of chlorine should be educated of the urgent necessity of reporting
immediately. They should also be suitably trained in imparting appropriate first
aid measures.

In the case or Chlorine gas inhalation the patient should immediately be removed
to an open area where fresh air is available. Clothes are to be loosened and shoes
removed. If breathing had not ceased, the patient should be placed on his back
with head and back elevated, and kept warm, rest is essential. If breathing has
apparently ceased, artificial respiration should be started immediately. If oxygen
inhalation equipment is available, a person authorized for such duty should
administer the oxygen. Stimulates are rarely necessary, where adequate oxygen
is maintained.

Drugs for stock treatment should be administered only by a physician. Milk,
butter milk, lime juice, etc. may be given in mild cases, of relief from throat
irritation. Cough mixtures and common throat lozenges such as Vicks, halls etc.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

are effective in relieving throat irritation. Nothing should ever be given by mouth
to an unconscious patient.

If liquid chlorine or chlorinated water has contaminated skin or clothing,
emergency shower should be used immediately, skin areas should be washed
with copious quantities of soap and water. No attempts should be made neutralize
chlorine with chemicals. No ointments should be applied for 24 hours.
Contaminated clothing should be removed immediately. If eyes have been
affected with liquid chlorine or high concentrations of chlorine gas, they should be
flushed immediately with running water for at least 1 minute (no attempt should
be made to neutralize with chemicals). Thereafter, as a first aid measure, 2 or 3
drops of 0.5% solution of Pontocaine or other effective topical anesthetic
xylocaine solution should be put into the eyes. No oils or oily ointments should be
used unless prescribed by an eye specialist. Swallowing of liquid chlorine is
extremely unlikely.

Short duration exposures of skin to high concentrations of chlorine gas is not
much irritating or corrosive. Splashes of liquid chlorine on the eye, skin and
clothing, may cause immediate irritation and chemical burns, as well as severe
damage to body tissues.

Chlorine gas produces no known cumulative effects. A concentration of 1 ppm of
chlorine gas may produce symptoms of irritation after several hours of exposures,
but workers exposed daily to detectable concentrating reported have shown no
chronic systemic effects.

7.6 Disaster Management Plan

The industry has a planned DMP for addressing any hazards and risks. A
comprehensive DMP for the proposed project is suggested in the following sections.

7.6.1 Disasters

A disaster is a catastrophic situation in which suddenly, people are plunged into
helplessness and suffering and, as a result, need protection, clothing, shelter,
medical and social care and other necessities of life.

Disasters can be divided into two main groups. In the first, are disasters resulting
from natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic eruptions, storm surges,
cyclones, tropical storms, floods, avalanches, landslides, forest fires. The second
group includes disastrous events occasioned by man, or by man's impact upon the
environment. Examples are armed conflict, industrial accidents, radiation accidents,
factory fires, explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river
pollution, mining or other structural collapses, air, sea, rail and road transport
accidents which can reach catastrophic dimensions in terms of human loss.

There can be no set criteria for assessing the gravity of a disaster in the abstract
since this depends to a large extent on the physical, economic and social
environment in which it occurs. What would be consider a major disaster in a
developing country, ill equipped to cope with the problems involved, may not mean
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

more than a temporary emergency elsewhere. However, all disasters bring in their
wake similar consequences that call for immediate action, whether at the local,
national or international level, for the rescue and relief of the victims. This includes
the search for the dead and injured, medical and social care, removal of the debris,
the provision of temporary shelter for the homeless, food, clothing and medical
supplies, and the rapid re-establishment of essential services.

7.6.2 Objectives of Disaster Management Plan [DMP]

The Disaster Management Plan is aimed to ensure safety of life, protection of
environment, protection of installation, restoration of production and salvage
operations in this same order of priorities. For effective implementation of the
Disaster Management Plan, it should be widely circulated and personnel trained
through rehearsals/drills.

The Disaster Management Plan should reflect the probable consequential severalties
of the undesired event due to deteriorating conditions or through 'Knock on' effects.
Further the management should be able to demonstrate that their assessment of
the consequences uses good supporting evidence and is based on currently
available and reliable information, incident data from internal and external sources
and if necessary the reports of out side agencies.
To tackle the consequences of a major emergency inside the plant or in the
immediate vicinity of the plant, a Disaster Management Plan has to be formulated.
The objective of the Industrial Disaster Management Plan is to make use of the
combined resources of the plant and the outside services to achieve the following:

Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;
Safeguard other people;
Minimize damage to property and the environment;
Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;
Identify any dead;
Provide for the needs of relatives;
Provide authoritative information to the news media;
Secure the safe rehabilitation of affected area; and
Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent inquiry into the
cause and circumstances of the Emergency.

In effect, it is to optimize operational efficiency to rescue, rehabilitate and render
medical help and to restore normalcy.

7.6.3 Emergencies

7.6.3.1 General Industrial Emergencies

The emergencies that could be envisaged in the plant and fuel storage are as
follows:

A situation of fire at the Hydrogen Plant;
A situation of fire at the tank farm of all storages;
Slow isolated fires;
Fast spreading fires;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Structural failures;
Contamination of food/water; and
Sabotage/Social disorder.

7.6.3.2 Specific Emergencies Anticipated

Fire and Explosion

Fire consequences can be disastrous, since they involve huge quantities of fuel
either stored or in dynamic inventory in pipelines or in nearby areas. Preliminary
hazard analysis has provided a basis for consequence estimation. Estimation can be
made by using various pool fire, tank fire consequence calculations. During the
study of Risk Assessment, the nature of damages is worked out and probability of
occurrence of such hazards is also drawn up.

7.6.4 Emergency Organization

It is recommended to setup an Emergency Organization. A senior executive who has
control over the affairs of the plant should lead the Emergency Organization. He
shall be designated as Site Controller. General Manager [O & M] can be designated
as the Incident Controller. In the case of stores, utilities, open areas, which are not
under the control of the Production Heads, Senior Executive responsible for
maintenance of utilities would be designated as Incident Controller. All the Incident
Controllers would be reporting to the Site Controller.

Each Incident Controller, for himself, organizes a team responsible for controlling
the incidence with the personnel under his control. Shift-in-charge would be the
reporting officer, who would bring the incidence to the notice of the Incidence
Controller and Site Controller.

Emergency Co-ordinators would be appointed who would undertake the
responsibilities like firefighting, rescue, rehabilitation, transport and provide
essential and support services. For this purposes, Security In-charge, Personnel
Department, Essential services personnel should be engaged. All these personnel
would be designated as Key personnel.

In each shift, electrical supervisor, electrical fitters, pump house in-charge, and
other maintenance staff would be drafted for emergency operations. In the event of
power or communication system failure, some of staff members in the office/plant
offices would be drafted and their services would be utilized as messengers for quick
passing of communications. All these personnel would be declared as essential
personnel.

7.6.4.1 Emergency Communication

Whoever notices an emergency situation such as fire, growth of fire, leakage etc
should inform his immediate superior and Emergency Control Center. A place nearer
to the Gate House Complex shall be identified as Emergency Control Center. The
person on-duty in the Emergency Control Center should appraise the Site Controller.
Site Controller verifies the situation from the Incident Controller of that area or the
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Shift In-charge and takes a decision about an impending On Site Emergency. This
would be communicated to all the Incident Controllers, Emergency Co-ordinators.
Simultaneously, the emergency warning system would be activated on the
instructions of the Site Controller.

7.6.5 Emergency Responsibilities

The responsibilities of the key personnel are appended below:

7.6.5.1 Site Controller

On receiving information about emergency would rush to Emergency Control Center
(ECC) and take charge of ECC and the situation. His responsibilities would be as
indicated below:

Assesses the magnitude of the situation on the advice of Incident Controller and
decides;
Whether the effected area needs to be evacuated;
Whether personnel who are at assembly points need to be evacuated;
Declares Emergency and orders for operation of emergency siren;
Organizes announcement by public address system about location of
emergency;
Assesses which areas are likely to be affected, or need to be evacuated or are to
be alerted;
Maintains a continuous review of possible development and assesses the
situation in consultation with Incident Controller and other Key Personnel as to
whether shutting down the plant or any section of the plant is required and if
evacuation of persons is required;
Directs personnel for rescue, rehabilitation, transport, fire, brigade, medical and
other designated mutual support systems locally available, for meeting
emergencies;
Controls evacuation of affected areas, if the situation is likely to go out of control
or effects are likely to go beyond the premises of the factory, informs the District
Emergency Authority, Police, Hospital and seeks their intervention and help;
Informs Inspector of Factories, Deputy Chief Inspector of Factories, Pollution
Control Board and other statutory authorities;
Gives a public statement, if necessary;
Keeps record of chronological events and prepares an investigation report and
preserves evidence; and
On completion of On Site Emergency and restoration of normalcy, declares all
clear and orders for all clear warning.

7.6.5.2 Incident Controller

Assembles the incident control team;
Directs operations within the affected areas with the priorities for safety to
personnel minimize damage to the plant, property and environment and
minimize the loss of materials;
Directs the shutting down and evacuation of plant and areas likely to be
adversely affected by the emergency;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Ensures that key personnel help is sought;
Provides advice and information to the Fire and Security Officer and the Local
Fire Services as and when they arrive;
Ensures that all non-essential workers/staff of the affected areas are evacuated
to the appropriate assembly points, and the areas are searched for casualties;
Has regard to the need for preservation of evidence so as to facilitate any
inquiry into the causes and circumstances, which caused or escalated the
emergency;
Co-ordinates with emergency services at the site;
Provides tools and safety equipment to the team members;
Keeps in touch with the team and advices them regarding the method of control
to be used; and
Keeps the Site Controller of Emergency informed of the progress being made.

7.6.5.3 Emergency Coordinator - Rescue, Fire Fighting

On knowing about emergency, rushes to ECC;
Helps the Incident Controller in containment of the emergency;
Ensure fire pumps are in operating condition and instructs pump house operator
to ready for any emergency with standby arrangement;
Guides the fire fighting crew i.e. firemen, trained plant personnel and security
staff;
Organizes shifting the fire fighting facilities to the emergency site, if required;
Takes guidance of the Incident Controller for fire fighting as well as assesses the
requirements of outside help;
Arranges to control the traffic at the gate and the incident area;
Directs the security staff to the incident site to take part in the emergency
operations under his guidance and supervision;
Evacuates the people in the plant or in the nearby areas as advised by Site
Controller;
Searches for casualties and arranges proper aid for them;
Assembles search and evacuation team;
Arranges for safety equipment for the members of this team;
Decides which paths the evacuated workers should follow; and
Maintains law and order in the area, and if necessary seeks the help of police.

7.6.5.4 Emergency Coordinator-Medical, Mutual Aid, Rehabilitation, Transport and
Communication

In the event of failure of electric supply and thereby internal telephone, sets up
communication point and establishes contact with the ECC;
Organizes medical treatment to the injured and if necessary will shift the injured
to near by hospitals;
Mobilizes extra medical help from outside, if necessary;
Keeps a list of qualified first aid providers for the plant and seeks their
assistance;
Maintains first aid and medical emergency requirements;
Makes sure that all safety equipment is made available to the emergency team;
Assists Site Controller with necessary data to coordinate the emergency
activities;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Assists Site Controller in updating emergency plan, organizing mock drills,
verification of inventory of emergency facilities and furnishing report to Site
Controller;
Maintains liaison with Civil Administration;
Ensures availability of canteen facilities and maintenance of rehabilitation center.
Liaises with Site Controller/Incident Controller;
Ensures transportation facility;
Ensures availability of necessary cash for rescue/rehabilitation and emergency
expenditure;
Controls rehabilitation of affected areas on discontinuation of emergency; and
Makes available diesel/petrol for transport vehicles engaged in emergency
operation.

7.6.5.5 Emergency Coordinator - Essential Services

Assists Site Controller and Incident Controller;
Maintains essential services like Diesel Generator, Water, Fire Water,
Compressed Air/Instrument Air, power supply for lighting;
Plans alternate facilities in the event of power failure, to maintain essential
services such as lighting, etc;
Organizes separate electrical connections for all utilities and emergency services
so that in the event of emergency or fires, essential services and utilities are not
affected;
Gives necessary instructions regarding emergency electrical supply, isolation of
certain sections etc. to shift in-charge and electricians; and
Ensures availability of adequate quantities of protective equipment and other
emergency materials, spares etc.

7.6.5.6 General Responsibilities of Employees during an Emergency

During an emergency, which becomes more enhanced and pronounced when an
emergency warning is raised, the workers who are in-charge of process equipment
should adopt safe and emergency shut down and attend to any prescribed duty as
essential employee. If no such responsibility is assigned, he should adopt a safe
course to assembly point and await instructions. He should not resort to spreading
panic. On the other hand, he must assist emergency personnel towards meeting the
objectives of DMP.

7.6.6 Emergency Facilities

7.6.6.1 Emergency Control Center (ECC)

The following information and equipment are to be provided at the Emergency
Control Center (ECC).

Intercom, telephone;
P and T telephone;
Self contained breathing apparatus;
Fire suit/gas tight goggles/gloves/helmets;
Hand tools, wind direction/velocities indications;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Public address megaphone, hand bell, telephone directories (internal, P and T)
Plant layout, site plan;
Emergency lamp/torch light/batteries;
Plan indicating locations of hazard inventories, plant control room, sources of
safety equipment, work road plan, assembly points, rescue location vulnerable
zones, escape routes;
Hazard chart;
Emergency shut-down procedures;
Nominal roll of employees;
List of key personnel, list of essential employees, list of Emergency
Coordinators;
Duties of key personnel;
Address with telephone numbers and key personnel, emergency coordinator,
essential employees; and
Important address and telephone numbers including Government agencies,
neighboring industries and sources of help, outside experts, fuel fact sheets and
population details around the factory.

7.6.6.2 Assembly Point

Number of assembly points, depending upon the plant location, would be identified
wherein employees who are not directly connected with the disaster management
would be assembled for safety and rescue. Emergency breathing apparatus,
minimum facilities like water etc would be organized. In view of the size of plant,
different locations would be ear marked as assembly points. Depending upon the
location of hazard, the assembly points are to be used.

7.6.6.3 Fire Fighting Facilities

First Aid and Fire fighting equipment suitable for emergency should be maintained in
each section in the plant. This would be as per statutory requirements. However,
fire hydrant line covering major areas would be laid. It would be maintained as 6-
kg/cm
2
pressure. Fire alarms should be located in the bulk storage areas. Fire officer
will be the commanding officer of fire fighting services.

7.6.6.4 Location of Wind Sock

Wind socks shall be installed at appropriate places in the plant to indicate direction
of wind for emergency escape.

7.6.6.5 Emergency Medical Facilities

Stretchers, gas masks and general first-aid materials for dealing with chemical
burns, fire burns etc would be maintained in the medical center as well as in the
emergency control room. Medical superintendent of the medical center will be the
head of the casualty services ward. Private medical practitioners help would be also
be sought. Government hospital would be approached for emergency help.

Apart from plant first aid facilities, external facilities would be augmented. Names of
Medical Personnel, Medical facilities in the area would be prepared and updated.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Necessary specific medicines for emergency treatment of Patients Burns would be
maintained.

Breathing apparatus and other emergency medical equipment would be provided
and maintained. Also, the help of nearby industries would be taken on mutual
support basis.

7.6.6.6 Ambulance

Availability of an ambulance with driver in all the shifts would be ensured to
transport injured or affected persons. Number of persons would be trained in first
aid so that, in every shift first aid personnel would be available.

7.6.7 Emergency Actions

7.6.7.1 Emergency Warning

The emergency would be communicated both to the personnel inside the plant and
the people outside. An emergency warning system shall be established for this
purpose.

7.6.7.2 Emergency Shutdown

There are number of facilities, which can be provided to help deal with hazardous
conditions, when a tank is on fire. The suggested arrangements are:

1. Stop feed;
2. Dilute contents;
3. Remove heat;
4. Deluge with water; and
5. Transfer contents.

Whether a given method is appropriate depends on the particular case.

7.6.7.3 Evacuation of Personnel

There could be a number of persons in the storage area and other areas in the
vicinity. The area would have adequate number of exits, staircases. In the event of
an emergency, unconnected personnel have to escape to assembly point. Operators
have to take emergency shutdown procedure and escape. Time Office shall maintain
a copy of deployment of employees in each shift at ECC. If necessary, persons can
be evacuated by rescue teams.

7.6.7.4 All Clear Signal

Also, at the end of an emergency, after discussing with Incident Controllers and
Emergency Co-ordinators, the Site Controller orders an all clear signal. When it
becomes essential, the Site Controller communicates to the District Emergency
Authority, Police, Fire Service personnel regarding help required or development of
the situation into an Off-Site Emergency. The on-site emergency organization chart
for various emergencies is shown in Figure-7.3.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies


FIGURE-7.3
ON-SITE EMERGENCY ORGANIZATION CHART
Operator
Shift Incharge
Safety Officer
Site Controller
Room
Emergency Control
Emergency Co-ordinator Emergency Co-ordinator
(Medical,Mutual,Aid
Rehabilitation,Transport
and Communication)
(Rescue,Fire Fighting)
Electrician,
First Aid,
Transport-Driver
Telephone-Operator
Electrician
Pump Operator
Emergency Co-ordinator
(Essential Services)
Pump Operator
Shift Incharge
Incident Controller
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.6.8.5 Employee Information

During an emergency, employees would be warned by raising siren in specific
pattern. Employees would be given training of escape routes and taking shelter.
Employees would be provided with information related to fire hazards, antidotes and
first aid measures. Those who would be designated as key personnel and essential
employees should be given training for emergency response.

7.6.8.6 Public Information and Warning

The industrial disaster effects related to this plant may mostly be confined to the
plant area. The detailed risk analysis has indicated that the pool fire effects would
not be felt outside. However, as an abundant precaution, the information related to
fuels in use would be furnished to District Emergency Authority for necessary
dissemination to general public and for any use during an off site emergency. Plants
of this size and nature have been in existence in our country for a long time.

7.6.8.7 Coordination with Local Authorities

Keeping in view of the nature of emergency, two levels of coordination are
proposed. In the case of an On Site Emergency, resources within the organization
would be mobilized and in the event extreme emergency local authorities help
would be sought.

In the event of an emergency developing into an off site emergency, local authority
and District Emergency Authority (normally the Collector) would be appraised and
under his supervision, the Off Site Disaster Management Plan would be exercised.
For this purpose, the facilities that are available locally, i.e. medical, transport,
personnel, rescue accommodation, voluntary organizations etc would be mustered.
Necessary rehearsals and training in the form of mock drills would be organized.

7.6.8.8 Mutual Aid

Mutual aid in the form of technical personnel, runners, helpers, special protective
equipment, transport vehicles, communication facility etc would be sought from the
neighboring industries.

7.6.8.9 Mock Drills

Emergency preparedness is an important part of planning in Industrial Disaster
Management. Personnel would be trained suitably and prepared mentally and
physically in emergency response through carefully planned, simulated procedures.
Similarly, the key personnel and essential personnel would be trained in the
operations.

7.6.8.10 Important Information

Once the Plant goes on stream, important information such names and addresses of
key personnel, essential employees, medical personnel outside the plant,
transporters address, address of those connected with Off Site Emergency such as
Police, Local Authorities, Fire Services, District Emergency Authority would be
prepared and maintained.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.7 Offsite Emergency Preparedness Plan

The task of preparing the Offsite Emergency Plan lies with the District Collector;
however the offsite plan will be prepared with the help of the local district
authorities. The proposed plan will be based on the following guidelines.

7.7.1 Introduction

Off-site emergency plan would follow the on-site emergency plan. When the
consequences of an emergency situation go beyond the plant boundaries, it
becomes an off-site emergency. Off-site emergency is essentially the responsibility
of the public administration. However, the plant management will provide the public
administration with the technical information relating to the nature, quantum and
probable consequences on the neighboring population.

The off-site plan in detail will be based on those events, which are most likely to
occur, but other less likely events, which have severe consequence, will also be
considered. Incidents which have very severe consequences yet have a small
probability of occurrence would also be considered during the preparation of the
plan. However, the key feature of a good off-site emergency plan is flexibility in its
application to emergencies other than those specifically included in the formation of
the plan.

The roles of the various parties who will be involved in the implementation of an off-
site plan are described below. Depending on local arrangements, the responsibility
for the off-site plan would either rest with the plant management or with the local
authority. Either way, the plan would identify an emergency coordinating officer,
who would take the overall command of the off-site activities. As with the on-site
plan, an emergency control center would be setup within which the emergency
coordinating officer can operate.

An early decision will be required in many cases on the advice to be given to
people living "within range" of the accident - in particular whether they should be
evacuated or told to go indoors. In the latter case, the decision can regularly be
reviewed in the event of an escalation of the incident. Consideration of evacuation
may include the following factors:

In the case of a major fire but without explosion risk (e.g. an oil storage tank),
only houses close to the fire are likely to need evacuation, although a severe
smoke hazard may require this to be reviewed periodically; and

If a fire is escalating and in turn threatening a store of hazardous material, it
might be necessary to evacuate people nearby, but only if there is time; if
insufficient time exists, people should be advised to stay indoors and shield
themselves from the fire. This later case particularly applies if the installation at
risk could produce a fireball with very severe thermal radiation effects.

Although the plan will have sufficient flexibility built in to cover the consequences of
the range of accidents identified for the on-site plan, it will cover in some detail the
handling of the emergency to a particular distance from each major hazard works.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.7.2 Aspects Proposed to be considered in the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The main aspects, which should be included in the emergency plan are:

Organization

Detail of command structure, warning systems, implementation procedures,
emergency control centers.

Names and appointments of incident controller, site main controller, their deputies
and other key personnel.

Communications

Identification of personnel involved, communication center, call signs, network, list
of telephone numbers.

Specialized Knowledge

Details of specialist bodies, firms and people upon whom it may be necessary to call
e.g. those with specialized fuel knowledge, laboratories.

Voluntary Organizations

Details of organizers, telephone numbers, resources etc

Fuel Information

Details of the hazardous substances stored and a summary of the risk associated
with them.

Meteorological Information

Arrangements for obtaining details of weather forecasts and weather conditions
prevailing at that time

Humanitarian Arrangements

Transport, evacuation centers, emergency feeding, treatment of injured, first aid,
ambulances and temporary mortuaries.

Public Information

Arrangements for (a) Dealing with the media press office; (b) Informing relatives,
etc

Assessment of Emergency Plan

Arrangements for:

(a) Collecting information on the causes of the emergency; and
(b) Reviewing the efficiency and effectiveness of all aspects of the emergency plan.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.7.3 Role of the Emergency Co-ordinating Officer

The various emergency services would be co-ordinated by an Emergency
Coordinating Officer (ECO), who will be designated by the district collector. The ECO
would liaison closely with the site main controller. Again depending on local
arrangements, for very severe incidents with major or prolonged off-site
consequences, the external control would be passed to a senior local authority
administrator or even an administrator appointed by the central or state
government. The ECO will be equipped with address and phone numbers of
important agencies.

7.7.4 Role of the Local Authority

The duty to prepare the off-site plan lies with the local authorities. The emergency
planning officer (EPO) appointed should carry out his duty in preparing for a whole
range of different emergencies within the local authority area. The EPO should
liaison with the plant, to obtain the information to provide the basis for the plan.
This liaison should ensure that the plan is continually kept upto date.

It will be the responsibility of the EPO to ensure that all those organizations which
will be involved off site in handling the emergency, know of their role and are able
to accept it by having for example, sufficient staff and appropriate equipment to
cover their particular responsibilities. Rehearsals for off-site plans should be
organized by the EPO.

7.7.5 Role of Police

Formal duties of the police during an emergency include protecting life and property
and controlling traffic movements.

Their functions should include controlling bystanders, evacuating the public,
identifying the dead and dealing with casualties, and informing relatives of death or
injury.

7.7.6 Role of Fire Authorities

The control of a fire should be normally the responsibility of the senior fire brigade
officer who would take over the handling of the fire from the site incident controller
on arrival at the site. The senior fire brigade officer should also have a similar
responsibility for other events, such as explosions. Fire authorities in the region
should be apprised about the location of all stores of flammable materials, water
and foam supply points, and fire-fighting equipment. They should be involved in on-
site emergency rehearsals both as participants and, on occasion, as observers of
exercises involving only site personnel.

7.7.7 Role of Health Authorities

Health authorities, including doctors, surgeons, hospitals, ambulances and so on,
should have a vital part to play following a major accident, and they should form an
integral part of the emergency plan.
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

For major fires, injuries should be the result of the effects of thermal radiation to a
varying degree, and the knowledge and experience to handle this in all but extreme
cases may be generally available in most hospitals.

Major off-site incidents are likely to require medical equipment and facilities
additional to those available locally, and a medical "mutual aid scheme should exist
to enable the assistance of neighboring authorities to be obtained in the event of an
emergency.

7.7.8 Role of Government Safety Authority

This will be the factory inspectorate available in the region. Inspectors are likely to
satisfy themselves that the organization responsible for producing the off-site plan
has made adequate arrangements for handling emergencies of all types including
major emergencies. They may wish to see well-documented procedures and
evidence of exercise undertaken to test the plan.

In the event of an accident, local arrangements regarding the role of the factory
inspector will apply. These may vary from keeping a watching brief to a close
involvement in advising on operations.

The action plan suggested for control of the off-site emergencies is given in Table-
7.17.
TABLE-7.17
OFF-SITE ACTION PLAN

Sr.
No.
Action Required to be taken to
Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving
agency
Responsible
Agencies for
taking action
Equipments/Material
facilities required at site
to mitigate Emergency
A
1
Arrangements for evacuation/
rescue of persons from zone of
influence to predetermined camps
2 Caution to public by
announcement
3 Traffic and Mob control by
cordoning of the area
4 Law & order
5 Request to railway authority for
keeping the nearest by railway
gate open & to stop the up &
down trains at the nearest railway
station
Police
Department
Self Breathing apparatus
with spare cylinder

Chemical gas mask with
spare canister

Vehicle with PA system

Transportation for
evacuation of people

B Control of fire
1 Scrubbing of the flashed off gas
cloud with water curtain
2 To rescue trapped persons
3 If fire is big, keep surrounding
area cool by spraying water
4 Communication to State Electricity
Board to continue or cut off
electric supply
5 Communication to water supply
District Fire
Brigade
Self breathing apparatus
with spare cylinders
Foam/water fire tenders
Gas mask with spare
canisters
Lime water
Neck to toe complete
asbestos suit, PVC hand
gloves, gumboots, safety
goggles
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Sr.
No.
Action Required to be taken to
Mitigate Disaster by Aid giving
agency
Responsible
Agencies for
taking action
Equipments/Material
facilities required at site
to mitigate Emergency
department for supplying water Mobile scrubbing system
along with suction
arrangement.
C Medical facilities for affected
persons (first aid and treatment)
Hospital and
public health
Ambulance with onboard
resuscitation unit, first aid,
stretchers
D Identification of concentration of
gas in zone of influence
Pollution
Control Board
Gas detector
E Removal of debris and damaged
structures
Municipal
corporation
Provide bulldozers
Provide cranes
F 1 Monitor the incoming and out
going transports
2 Arrange emergency shifting of
affected persons and non affected
person to specified area
3 Arrange diesel/petrol for needed
vehicles
Transport
department
Provide traffic police at site
Provide emergency shifting
vehicles at site
Provide stock of fuel for
vehicles
G 1 Give all information related to
meteorological aspects for safe
handling of affected area for living
beings
2 Forecast important weather
changes, if any
Meteorological
Department
Provide wind direction and
velocity instruments with
temperature measurements
Mobile van for
meteorological parameter
measurements

H1 Representatives of all
departments are in the local crisis
group; therefore they are
expected to render services
available with them. Since it is a
group of experts with authority,
the mitigating measures can be
implemented speedily. The
representatives from locals are
also there so that communication
with local people is easy and
quick.
2 The district emergency or disaster
control officer / collector shall be
the president and he shall do
mock drill etc so that action can
be taken in right direction in time
Local Crises
Group
Must have all resources at
hand, specially disaster
management plan and its
implementation method.
All relevant information
related to hazardous
industry shall available with
crisis group
Newspaper editor shall be a
part of the group so that
right and timely media
release can be done

I 1 Collector shall be the President of
District Crisis Group therefore all
district infrastructure facilities are
diverted to affected zone
2 All other functions as mentioned
for local crisis group
District Crisis
Group
All necessary facilities
available at district can be
made available at affected
zone

Control of law and order
situation

Chapter-7
Additional Studies

7.8 Occupational Health and Safety

With the rapid increase in the economic activity, the demand for electricity has also
increased. As a result several power generation plants were established in India
including those operated by Bharuch Power Limited. The power generation projects
involve a multitude of activities both during construction and operational phases of
the project development. For large industries, during construction, erection, testing,
commissioning, operation and maintenance; the men, materials and machines are
the basic inputs. Along with the boons, industrialization generally brings several
problems like occupational health and safety.

The industrial planner, therefore, has to properly plan and take steps to minimize
the impacts of industrialization and to ensure appropriate occupational health and
safety including fire plans. All these activities again may be classified under
construction and erection, and operation and maintenance.

7.8.1 Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and erection and
operation and maintenance phases. However, the problem varies both in magnitude
and variety in the above phases.

Construction and Erection

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to
constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to
arrangements to reduce it within TLV's, necessary protective equipments shall be
supplied to workers.

Operation and Maintenance

The problem of occupational health, in the operation and maintenance phase is
primarily due to noise which could affect hearing. The necessary personal protective
equipments will be given to all the workers. The working personnel shall be given
the following appropriate personnel protective equipments.

Industrial Safety Helmet;
Crash Helmets;
Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;
Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;
Zero power goggles with cut type filters on both sides and blue color glasses;
Welders equipment for eye and face protection;
Cylindrical type earplug;
Ear muffs;
Canister Gas mask;
Self contained breathing apparatus;
Leather apron;
Aluminized fiber glass fix proximity suit with hood and gloves;
Boiler suit;
Safety belt/line man's safety belt;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Leather hand gloves;
Asbestos hand gloves;
Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;
Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;
Lead hand glove;
Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves; and
Industrial safety shoes with steel toe.

Full-fledged hospital facilities shall be available round the clock for attending
emergency arising out of accidents, if any. All working personnel shall be medically
examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of employment.
This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.

7.8.2 Safety Plan

Safety of both men and materials during construction and operation phases is of
concern. Safety plan shall be prepared and implemented in the proposed . The
preparedness of an industry for the occurrence of possible disasters is known as
emergency plan. The disaster in the plant is possible due to collapse of structures
and fire/explosion etc.

Keeping in view the safety requirement during construction, operation and
maintenance phases, the would formulate safety policy with the following
regulations:

To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;
To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account in
the design, construction, operation and maintenance of plants, machinery and
equipment;
To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;
To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and
clothing and to ensure their proper use;
To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in their
work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;
To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of experience and
upto date knowledge;
To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries and
illness at work;
To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to
employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity is
given to these matters;
To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an appropriate
fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel involved in this
service;
To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident, sickness
and incident involving people injury or injury to health with a view to taking
corrective, remedial and preventive action;
To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health and
safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common language
of employees;
To prepare separate safety rules for each type of occupation/processes involved
in a plant; and
To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals
of all buildings, equipments, work places and operations.

7.8.3 Safety Organization

Construction and Erection Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer shall be appointed. The responsibilities of
the safety officer include identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts
of workers and advise on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training
programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to
occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of
Safety Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer by
industry, every contractor, who employs more than 250 workers, shall also employ
one safety officer to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions
of contract.

Operation and Maintenance Phase

When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers shall be in
accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and
responsibilities shall be as defined there of.

7.8.4 Safety Circle

In order to fully develop the capabilities of the employees in identification of
hazardous processes and improving safety and health, safety circles would be
constituted in each area of work. The circle would consist of 5-6 employees from
that area. The circle normally shall meet for about an hour every week.

7.8.5 Safety Training

A full-fledged training center shall be set up at the plant. Safety training shall be
provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty members called from
Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular employees,
limited contractor labors shall also be provided safety training. To create safety
awareness safety films shall be shown to workers and leaflets shall be distributed.
Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to prevent fires
are:

Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of cable
passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and identifying the
area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective automatic and manual fire
fighting operations;

Spread of fire in horizontal direction would be checked by providing fire stops for
cable shafts;
Chapter-7
Additional Studies

Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper zoning and
interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor galleries;
Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and
regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and fire fighting; and

Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.8.6 Bharuch Power Limiteds Health and Safety Policy

The health of all employees shall be monitored once in a year for early detection of
any ailment due to exposure to heat and noise.

Keeping in view the health and safety requirement during the construction and
operation phases of the project, the Bharuch Power Limited will formulate health
and safety policy with the following objectives:

1. To allocate sufficient resources to maintains safe and health work
environment.
2. To take steps to ensure that all safety factors are incorporated in the design,
construction and operation stages of the plant, machinery and equipment.
3. To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all the employees
4. To provide protective equipment, safety appliances and clothing and to ensure
their proper use.
5. To inform employees about materials, equipments, processes etc which are
known to be potentially hazardous to health or to safety.
6. To keep all methods and operations of work under regular review for making
necessary changes from point of view of health and safety.
7. To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of injuries
and illness at work.
8. To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an
appropriate fire fighting service together with training facilities for personnel
involved in this service.
9. To ensure that professional services are made available wherever potentially
hazardous situations exist or might arise.
10. To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident sickness
and incident involving personnel injury or injury to health with a view to
taking corrective, remedial and preventive action.
11. To promote through their established machinery, joint consultation in health
and safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees.
12. To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common
language of employees.
13. To prepare safety rules for each types of occupation/processes involved in the
project.
14. To ensure safety inspection by a competent person at suitable intervals of all
buildings, equipments, work place and operations.

Project Benefits

8.0 PROJECT BENEFITS

Proposed project will result in considerable growth of stimulating the industrial
and commercial activities in the state. Small and medium scale industries may be
further developed as a consequence.

Proposed power project would be beneficial in reducing the existing and ever
escalating demand of electricity in western part of the country.

In operation phase, the proposed project would require significant workforce of
non-technical and technical persons. Migration of persons with better education
and professional experience will result in increase of literacy in the surrounding
villages.

8.1 Availability of Quality Power

The proposed project would be generating about 7200 MW of energy and will
contribute to government of Indias target of adding 100,000 MW power
generation capacity by 2012. The project will be beneficial in governments target
of providing power access to all people.

8.2 Improvements in the Physical Infrastructure

The beneficial impact of proposed power plant on the civic amenities will be
substantial after the commencement of project activities. The basic requirement
of the community needs will be strengthened by extending healthcare,
educational facilities to the community, building/strengthening of existing roads in
the area. Bharuch Power Limited will initiate the above amenities either by
providing or by improving the facilities in the area, which will help in uplifting the
living standards of local communities.

The construction of new roads /strengthening of roads in the project area will
enhance the transportation facilities. Roads will be laid to facilitate the movement
of materials and equipment during construction and operation of the units.
However, temporary roads would be built on the basis of plant layout during
construction period, which will be subsequently converted to permanent roads.
With improved transportation facilities there is always a scope for development.

8.3 Improvement in the Social Infrastructure

Generation of employment: The project will create opportunities for direct and
indirect employment;

Increase in purchasing power and improved standard of living of the area;

Further development of small and medium scale industries may be developed
as consequence;

Increased revenue to the state by way of royalty, taxes and duties;

Project Benefits

Overall growth of the neighboring area viz.:
Agriculture and animal husbandry;
Health and family welfare;
Watershed development;
Sustainable livelihood and strengthening of village Self Help Groups; and
Infrastructure development.

In addition to above, due to increase in purchasing power of local habitants:

There shall be significant change in the socioeconomic scenario of the area;

The proposed project shall enhance the prospects of employment;

Recruitment for the unskilled and semiskilled workers for the proposed project
will be from the nearby villages;

The basic amenities viz. roads, transportation, electricity, proper sanitation,
educational institutions, medical facilities, entertainment etc will be developed
as far as possible; and

Overall the proposed project will change living standards of the people and
improve the socioeconomic conditions of the area.

8.4 Employment Potential

The impact of the project on the economic aspects can be clearly observed. The
proposed project activities will provide employment to persons of different skills
and trades. The local population will be given preference to employment. The
employment potential will ameliorate economic conditions of these families
directly and provide employment to many other families indirectly who are
involved in business and service oriented activities.

The employment of local people in primary and secondary sectors of project shall
upgrade the prosperity of the region. This in turn will improve the socioeconomic
conditions of the area.

During construction phase of the project, this project will provide temporary
employment to many unskilled and semi skilled laborers in nearby villages.
This project will also help in generation of indirect employment to those
people who render their services for the personnel directly working in the
project; and

During operational phase, considerable number of people will be benefited by
provision of services to the residents. Thus, the direct and indirect
employment generation by this project.

The trend of out migration for employment, if any, is likely to be reduced due to
better economic opportunities available in the area.

During the construction phase about 1000 people on average per day will be
engaged for a period of three to four years. A township is proposed to provide
accommodation for permanent employees of the power plant.

Project Benefits

8.5 Corporate Social Responsibility

Reliance ADAG believes in principle that "Growth Does Not Exist in Isolation. For
Reliance ADAG, being socially responsible is not an occasional act, but it is an
ongoing year round commitment, which is integrated into the very core of their
business objectives and strategy. Reliance ADAG believes that an environment of
common trust and confidence building is essential during project implementation.

The main guiding principles of Reliance ADAGs Corporate Social Responsibilities
are:

Adopt an approach that aims at achieving a greater balance between social
and economic development;

Adopt new measures to accelerate and ensure the satisfaction of the basic
needs of all people;

Work towards elimination of all barriers to the social inclusion of
disadvantaged groups- such as the poor or the disabled; and
Give unfailing attention to children, for in their hands lies the future of the
country. It is for their sake that health, education and environment are given
priority in their programme and investments.

The list of CSR activities proposed to be carried out by Bharuch Power Limited,
regularly in surrounding villages are as follows:

Sr. No. Activity Description
1 Mobile Medical Clinic Fully equipped mobile medical van with
essential medicines, equipments for basic
treatment, qualified doctor, nurse and
pharmacist
2 Health camps General and Specialized Medical Camps for
the villagers, in tie-up with nearby hospital
and / or local NGOs and Distribution of free
medicines to health sufferers
Awareness Camp Awareness camp of health and hygiene,
Mother and child care etc.
Distribution of books, uniforms and other
educational kits to weaker section students
Education allowance to students from
weaker section till higher secondary and
providing sponsorships for higher education,
Scholarship to highest mark securing
students upto 12th Standard
3 Education allowance
Felicitation to the highest marks scoring
students in HSC/SSC or receives any
educational merit
4 School upgradation maintenance and Upgradation of the local
schools and colleges
5 Computer Training Providing computer training to youths
6 ITI-Coaching & Training Fees to be paid for training on annual basis
7 ITI - Adoption Refurbishment of nearby ITI by upgrading
building and other training enabling
Project Benefits

Sr. No. Activity Description
infrastructure
8 Income generating projects Financial assistance to people for
encouraging their traditional skills, like
Development of fodder farm, fruit bearing
orchards, vocational training etc. to setup
income generating projects
9 Sanitation & Drinking Water Facilities for drinking water and proper
sanitation in periphery villages
10 Roads & Drainage Strengthening of existing or development of
new main/approach road, proper drainage
system
11 Improvement in electricity
supply
Provision of street lights etc.
12 Renewable resources Encouraging and providing assistance to the
villagers for the use of renewable source of
energy like solar street lights, solar
cookers/heaters etc.
13 Rainwater harvesting Encouraging and providing assistance to the
villagers for the adaptation of Rainwater
harvesting technologies like rooftop
harvesting, recharge well, surface
percolation impounding etc.
14 Community Centers in
villages
Construction of Community Centers
15 Physiotherapy centre A physiotherapy centre
16 Cultural and Social events Literacy, health, sanitation, population
control, environmental, HIV, cleanliness,
Drives
17 Exigency Assistance Assistance to the suffering families during
exigencies
18 Old age/ widow/ disabled/
psychiatric persons
Pension for old aged/ widow/ disabled/
psychiatric persons

The said CSR activities will be implemented during operation of the plant.

Chapter-9
Administrative Aspects

9.0 ADMINISTRATIVE ASPECTS

9.1 Introduction

The Chapter-4 identified measures for environment protection especially for
providing the necessary pollution control to comply with the standards stipulating
the limits for emitting pollutants in air, water or on land so that the assimilative
capacity is not exceeded.

Environment policy at industry level is yet to be defined formally. Standards are
stipulated by various regulatory agencies to limit the emission of pollutants in air
and water. Similarly, a mandatory practice is recommended for preparing an
Environment Statement each year in order to encourage the industries to allow
efficient use of resources in their production processes and reduce the quantities of
wastes per unit of product. This in itself is not sufficient since this does not provide
an assurance that its environment performance not only meets, but will continue to
meet, legislative and policy requirements.

9.2 Formation of an Environment Management System

Environment Management Systems (EMS) are suggested at the industry level for
ensuring that the activities, products and services of the region conform to the
carrying capacity (supportive and assimilative capacity) based issues. This is based
on Bureau of Indian Standard Specification IS:13967: Environment Management
Systems - Specification. Since this is more in line with the quality systems, it is
recommended that the proposed plant develop one as outlined in the following sub-
sections.

The EMS - its set-up, role and responsibilities - is given subsequently.

The environment management system to be formed by each industry will enable it
to maximize its beneficial effects and minimize its adverse effects - with emphasis
on prevention. It should:

Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from the industry's
proposed activities, products and services to determine those of significance;

Identify and evaluate the environmental effects arising from incidents,
accidents and potential emergency situations;

Identify the relevant legislative and regulatory requirements;

Enable priorities to be identified and pertinent environmental objectives and
targets to be set;

Facilitate planning, control, monitoring, auditing and review activities to ensure
that the policy is complied with; and

Allow periodic evaluation to suit changing circumstances so that it remains
relevant.

Chapter-9

9.2.1 Implementation of an Environment Management System

9.2.1.1Commitment

It is essential that the top management of the industry is committed to
development of its activities in an environmentally sound manner and supports all
efforts in achieving this objective.

Experience has shown that all attempts to change the processes and production
methods which reduce/prevent wastes and inefficient use of resources ultimately
result not only in environmentally sound practices but also better business returns.

9.2.1.2 Preparatory Environment Review

An industry with no formal environment management system should first establish
its current position with regards to environment through a preparatory
environment review. This should cover four areas:

Legislative and regulatory requirements;

Evaluation and registration of significant parameters and their environmental
impacts;

Review of proposed environment management practices and procedures; and

Assessment of feedback from investigation of previous environment incidents
and non-compliance with legislation, regulations or existing policies and
procedures.

The resulting report should address:

The nature and extent of problems and deficiencies;

The priorities to be accorded to rectify them; and

An improvement programme designed to ensure that the personnel and
material resources required are identified and made available.

9.2.1.3 Environment Policy

The industry's management should actively initiate, develop and support the
environment policy, which is relevant to its activities, products and services and
their environmental effects.

Broadly this should:

Be consistent with the occupational health and safety policy and other industrial
policies (such as quality policy);

Chapter-9

Indicate which of the industrial activities are covered by the environment
management system;

Be communicated and implemented at all levels of the industry; and

Be available publicly.

9.2.1.4 Organization and Personnel

To facilitate the implementation of the EMS, one of the most important aspects
relate to the organization and personnel. The related issues are:

Define and document the responsibility, authority and interrelations of key
personnel involved in the implementation of the environment policy, objectives
and environment management system;

Identify the in-house verification requirements and procedures including
resources and personnel;

Appoint a Management Representative (MR);

Communicate to employees at all levels the importance of compliance with the
environment policy, their role and responsibilities in achieving compliance, the
potential consequences of departures from the specified procedures, and
identify and provide appropriate training; and

Establish and maintain procedures to ensure that contractors are made aware
of the environment management system requirements and provisions.

9.2.1.5 Environmental Effects

The industry should establish and maintain procedures for:

Receiving, documenting and responding to internal as well as external
communications concerning environmental aspects and management;

Identifying, examining and evaluating the environmental effects of its activities
under normal and abnormal/emergency situations (including risk assessment)
and compiling significant effects in a register; and

Recording all legislative, regulatory and other policy requirements and codes in
a register.

9.2.1.6 Environmental Objectives and Targets

The objectives should be set with a view to realizing gradual and steady
improvements in environmental performance through application of best available
and economically viable technology.

Chapter-9

The areas targeted for improvement should be those where improvements are
most necessary to reduce risks (to environment and industry) and liabilities. These
should be identified through cost-benefit analysis wherever practicable and should
be quantitative and achievable.

9.2.1.7 Environment Management Programme

The establishment of an environment management programme is the key to
compliance with the industry's environment policy and achievement of the
environment objectives and targets.

It should designate the responsibility for achieving the targets at each level and the
means thereof. It should deal with the actions required for the consequences of the
industry's past activities as well as address the life cycle of development of new
products so as to effectively control adverse impacts.

9.2.1.8 Environment Management Manual and Documentation

The documentation is intended to provide an adequate description of the
environment management system. The manual is expected to provide a reference
to the implementation and maintenance of the system.

9.2.1.9 Operational Control

The management responsibilities should be defined to ensure that the control,
verification, measurement and testing of environment parameters within the
industry are adequately coordinated and effectively performed.

The control, verification, measurement and testing should be made through
documented procedures and work instructions defining the manner of conducting
activities, the absence of which can lead to violation of the environment policy.

In the event of non-compliance, procedures for investigation of the causative
mechanism should be established and the factors reported for corrective actions.

9.2.1.10 Environment Management Records

The industry should establish and maintain a system of records to demonstrate
compliance with the environment management systems and the extent of
achievement of the environment objectives and targets. In addition the other
records (legislative, audit and review reports), management records should address
the following:

Details of failure in compliance and corrective action;
Details of incidents and corrective action;
Details of complaints and follow up action;
Appropriate contractor and supplier information;
Inspection and maintenance reports;
Product identification and composition data;
Monitoring data; and
Environment training records.
Chapter-9

9.2.1.11Environment Management Audits

The management audits are to determine whether the activities are conforming to
the environment management systems and effective in implementing the
environment policy. They may be internal or external, but carried out impartially
and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad knowledge of the
environment process and expertise in relevant disciplines is also required.
Appropriate audit programmes and protocols should be established.

9.2.1.12 Environment Statement

As a mandatory requirement under the Environment Protection Rules (1986) as
amended through the Notification issued by the Ministry of Environment and
Forests in April 1993, an Environment Statement should be prepared annually. This
should include the consumption of total resources (raw material and water per
tonne of product), quantity and concentration of pollutants (air and water)
discharged, quantity of hazardous and solid waste generation, pollution abatement
measures, conservation of natural resources and cost of production vis-a-vis the
investment on pollution abatement. This may be an internal or external audit, but
carried out impartially and effectively by a person properly trained for it. Broad
knowledge of the environment process and expertise in relevant disciplines is also
required.

The intention of this statement is:

To identify the process/production areas where resources can be used more
efficiently through a comparison with the figures of a similar industry (thereby
reducing the consumption per unit of product);

To determine the areas where waste generation can be minimized at source
and through end of pipe treatment (thereby reducing the wastes generated and
discharged per unit of product); and

To initiate a self correcting/improvement system through an internal analysis to
achieve cost reduction through choice of superior technology and more efficient
practices.

9.2.1.13 Environment Management Reviews

The senior management should periodically review the Environment Management
System (EMS) to ensure its suitability and effectiveness. The need for possible
changes in the environment policy and objectives for continuous improvement
should be ascertained and revisions made accordingly.

EMS based on the above objectives should be formulated and implemented at the
industry level.

Chapter-9

9.3 Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures suggested above should be implemented so as to reduce
the impact on environment due to the operations of the proposed plant. In order to
facilitate easy implementation, mitigation measures are phased as per the priority
implementation. The implementation schedule is given in Table-9.1.

TABLE-9.1
IMPLEMENTATION SCHEDULE

Sr.
No.
Recommendations Time Requirement
(Months)
Implementation
schedule
1 Air pollution control
measures
Before commissioning of
respective units
Immediate
2 Water pollution control
measures
Before commissioning of the
plant
Immediate
3 Noise control measures Along with the commissioning of
the plant
Immediate
4 Ecological preservation Stage-wise implementation Immediate &
Progressive

9.4 Institutional Arrangements for Pollution Control

9.4.1 Environment Monitoring Cell at Jambusar Power Station

An environment cum chemical laboratory will be established at Jambusar Power
Station. The laboratory will be equipped with state of the art instruments and
chemicals required for environment monitoring and sample analysis purposes.

The Environment Monitoring Cell is headed by a senior and well qualified
Environmentalist duly supported by other environment staff and technical
workers.

The job of the laboratory is to ensure the environment health and safety
compliance by the plant coupled with the monitoring, analysis and reporting of
environment parameters to be furnished to various state and central government
authorities as per statuary requirements.

9.5 Cost Provision for Environment Measures

The capital cost of proposed project is Rs. 25200 crores. It is proposed to invest
Rs. 201.8 Crores on pollution control, treatment and monitoring systems for
proposed project. In addition to this, sufficient amount will be spent on greenbelt
development in and around the proposed power plant. The break up of the
investment is given in the following Table-9.2.

Chapter-9

TABLE-9.2
COST PROVISION FOR ENVIRONMENT MEASURES

Cost (Rs. Crores) Sr.
No.
Item Description
Capital Recurring/
annum
1 Air Pollution Control 105.5 6.4
2 Water and Wastewater Treatment 5.25 0.2
3 Noise Pollution Control 5.25 0.2
4 Environment Monitoring and Management 21.9 0.45
5 Occupational Health and Safety 8.75 0.9
6 Green Belt Development 5 0.25
7 Fire Protection System 50.15 1.8
Total 201.8 10.2

Chapter-10
Summary and Conclusion

10.0 SUMMARY AND CONCLUSION

10.1 Justification for Implementation of the Project

Bharuch Power Limited proposes to establish 7200 MW natural gas fired CCPP.
The proposed gas based CCPP will have marginal impacts on the local
environment. However, with the implementation of the proposed pollution control
and environment management measures, even the minor impacts anticipated due
to construction and operation of the proposed project will be mitigated.

The total plant area is 1900 acres (769 ha) and is in the possession of Bharuch
Power Limited. No rehabilitation is required.

The proposed project will provide direct employment to a large number of
personnel. This project will also generate indirect employment to a considerable
number of families, who will render their services for the project.

Thus, in view of considerable benefits from the project without any adverse
environmental impact, the proposed project is most advantageous to the region
as well as to the nation.

10.2 Summary of the EIA report

10.2.1 Project Description

Reliance Infrastructure Limited (Bharuch Power Limited), a part of Anil
Dhirubhai Ambani Group (ADAG) proposes to establish 7200 MW gas based
thermal power plant at Khanpur-deh village, Jambusar taluka, Bharuch district of
Gujarat. The capital cost of proposed project is Rs. 25200 crores.

As per the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification dated 14
th

September, 2006 and the amendments thereof, commissioning of thermal power
plants (l500 MW) falls under category À under project type 1(D) and requires
Environmental Clearance (EC) to be obtained from MoEF before the
commencement of ground activity.

The requirement of natural gas based on analysis of gas now available works out
to around 28 MMSCMD for the proposed 7200 MW power project. It is envisaged
that natural gas for the power plant station would be obtained by proposed gas
pipeline route of KGD basin of Reliance Industries Limited (RIL) and RLNG supply
by Dahej /Hazira LNG Terminal. It is envisaged to draw around 500 MLD sea water
for the proposed project, to be used for condenser cooling, may taken from
adjoining Dhadhar River/Creek. The sweet water requirement for the project shall
be about 30 MLD to be drawn from desalination. Eighteen 70 m stacks will be
provided to suitably disperse the emissions over a wide area. The salient features
of the power plant are given in Table-10.1.

Chapter-10

TABLE-10.1
SALIENT FEATURES OF PROPOSED UNITS

Sr. No.
Features Details
1 Plant Capacity 7200 MW (Natural Gas & / or R-LNG (Dual fuel)
2 Configuration 9 x800 MW modules
3 Gas / RLNG Supply RILs KGD Basin / Dahej/Hazira LNG Terminal
4 Fuel requirement Natural Gas or RLNG - 28.0 Million SM
3
/day (MMSCMD)
5 Alternate Fuel HSD
6 Plant Area Around 1900 acre (769 ha)
7 Water Requirement 500 MLD
8 Raw Water Source Desalination (Dhadhar River as sea water source)
9 Sea water source Dhadhar river (intake point at 6 km)
10 Manpower Requirement 250

10.2.2 Description of the Environment
Location and Description of the Site
The proposed project site is located in Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar taluka,

Bharuch district, Gujarat at the northern bank of tidally influence Dhadhar
river/Creek. HTL/LTL/CRZ demarcation of the Project site has already been
carried out by the Institute of Environmental Studies and Wetland Management,
Kolkata (A MoEF recognised agency).

The topography of the land at project site is almost plain. The environmental
setting of the proposed plant site is given in Table-10.2.

Environmental Setting

Baseline environmental studies for the various environmental attributes were
carried out during March to May 2010 covering premonsoon season. The details
of the base line study are presented as follows:

TABLE-10.2
ENVIRONMENTAL SETTING OF THE SITE

Plant Location
Village Khanpur-Deh
Taluka Jambusar
District Bharuch
1
State Gujarat
2 Plant Site Coordinates (A) 21 59 18.64 N 72 44 35.56 E
(B) 21 57 47.85 N 72 45 31.02 E
(C) 21 57 46.15 N 72 46 29.52 E
(D) 21 59 10.67 N 72 47 10.15 E
3 Plant site elevation above MSL 5-6 m above MSL
4 Survey of India Toposheet No 46 B/16
5 Plant Site Topography Generally plain
6 Nearest Highway SH-6 (4.1 km SE);
NH-8 (39 km E)
Chapter-10

7 Nearest Railway Station Jambusar RS (5.5 km NNE)
8 Nearest Airport Vadodara (65 km NE)
9 Nearest Seaport Dahej port (30 km SSW)
10 Nearest river Dhadhar river (0.5 km S)
11 Nearest Town/City Jambusar (5.5 km NNE)
12 Nearest Village Khanpur Deh (0.3 km N)
13 Villages within 1 km radius Khanpur Deh (0.3 km N)
14 Distance from the sea coast Gulf of Khambhat (25 km W)
15 Hills/Valleys No hills and valleys within 10 km radius
16 Archaeologically important places None within 10 km radius

17 Protected areas as per Wildlife
Protection Act,1972
None within 10 km radius

18 Reserved/ Protected Forests None within 10 km radius
19 Seismicity Seismic Zone-III as per IS 1893 (Part I): 2002
20 Defence Installations None within 10 km radius area

Baseline Environment

The 10 km radial distance from the plant boundary has been considered as study
area for EIA baseline studies. Environmental monitoring for various attributes like
meteorology, ambient air quality, surface and ground water quality, soil
characteristics, noise levels and flora & fauna have been conducted at specified
locations and the secondary data collected from various Government and Semi-
Government organizations.

10.2.3 Meteorology

Continuous onsite monitoring was undertaken for various meteorological variables
in order to record the site specific premonsoon season data. The maximum and
minimum temperatures recorded during the study period are 38.4
0
C and 22.5
0
C.
The relative humidity found varying from 25.1 to 67.7%.

10.2.4 Ambient Air Quality

The prime objective of the baseline air monitoring is to evaluate the existing air
quality of the area. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to
standards of the ambient air quality during the operation of the proposed power
plant project. Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at ten
locations.

The results of the monitored data indicate that the ambient air quality of the
region in general is in conformity with respect to industrial, residential, rural and
other areas of National Ambient Air Quality standards of CPCB, with present level
of activities.

10.2.5 Water Quality

Ten groundwater sources and four surface water samples within the study area
were considered for assessment during the study period.

Chapter-10

Surface Water Quality

It is observed that the concentrations of all the Parameters, in comparison with IS:
2296, come under Class `C, category of drinking water source without conventional
treatment but with disinfection.

Ground Water Quality

It can be observed that the concentrations of all the parameters are in comparison
with IS: 10500-1983 and fall in the category of water fit for drinking after
conventional treatment.

10.2.6 Noise Level Survey

The foremost objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to evaluate the
baseline noise and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated
by proposed project. Ten locations were monitored for assessing the noise levels
in and around the project location.

It is observed that the day and night time noise levels are in broadly in accordance
to the prescribed limit for rural/ residential /commercial and industrial zones.

10.2.7 Soil Characteristics

A total of eight samples within 10 km radius of the plant site were collected for the
assessment of soil quality during the study period. The nitrogen values are in the
range of 39 - 142.1 kg/ha indicating that the soils have nitrogen content of very
less to good. The potassium values range between 595.4 - 970.9 kg/ha, which
indicate that the soils have more than sufficient quantity of potassium. The
phosphorus values range between 35.2-75.1 kg/ha, which indicate that the soils
have very less quantity of phosphorus. The soil from the study area shows
moderate fertility.

10.2.8 Ecology

An ecological survey of the study area was conducted particularly with reference to
listing of species and assessment of the existing baseline ecological (Terrestrial and
Aquatic ecosystem) conditions during the study period. There are no reserved
/protected forests in the study area. There are no national parks and sanctuaries
either in the study area of 10 km radius of the project boundary.

10.2.9 Socio-Economic Environment

As per 2001 census the study area consists of 94902 persons inhabited in the
study area of 10 km radial distance from the periphery of the proposed plant. The
study area had an average family size of 5 persons per household in 2001. The
density of population reveals that the study area has an overall density of 256
persons per km
2
(PP km
2
) as per 2001 census reports. The configuration of male
and female indicates that the males constitute to about 51.65% and 48.35%
females to of the total population.
Chapter-10

10.3 Anticipated Environmental Impacts and Mitigation Measures
The environmental impacts during construction and operation phases of the
proposed project have been assessed and adequate management plan has been
evolved to mitigate the impacts.
10.3.1 Constructional Phase
The land requirement for the proposed plant is about 1900 acres (769 ha). The
environmental impacts during the construction stage will be short term, temporary
in nature and will be confined very close to project sites. The manpower required for
these activities should preferably be employed from nearby villages.
10.3.2 Operation Phase
Air Environment

Fuel to be used for proposed 7200 MW CCPP will be natural gas with a consumption
of 28 million Sm
3
per day. Being a natural gas based thermal power plant, the main
air pollutant would be NO
x
only. Adequate stack height of 70 m will be provided to
suitably disperse the emissions over a wide area. In order to keep NO
x
level within
the stipulated limit DLN system is envisaged.

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out employing
mathematical model based on a steady state gaussian plume dispersion model,
Industrial Source Complex [ISC3] designed for multiple point sources for short
term. The NO
x
emissions are calculated based on 50 ppm emission standards while
firing 100% gas. The maximum incremental short term 24 hourly GLCs for NO
x

likely to be encountered during premonsoon season are 27.4 g/m
3
at a distance of
about 2.8 km in NE direction. The predictions indicate that the area is unlikely to be
significantly affected due to the proposed power plant.
Water Environment

The main water requirement for the CCPP is for cooling purpose. It is envisaged to
draw around 500 MLD sea water for the proposed project, to be used for different
purposes including condenser cooling, may taken from adjoining Dhadhar
River/Sea. The raw water requirement for the project shall be about 30 MLD either
to be met through desalination. The project will not extract groundwater and
hence there will be no impact on ground water.

Cooling tower blowdown will be used in HVAC makeup and service purposes.
Remaining blowdown will be routed to the Central Monitoring Basin. All the plant
drains, boiler blow down, DM plant wastewater and miscellaneous effluents of the
plant would be treated and collected in Central Monitoring Basin. Sewage
Treatment Plant (STP) has been proposed for treatment of domestic effluent from
the power plant. The treated wastewater will be utilized for greenbelt
development within the plant complex. However, the entire wastewater will not
be utilized and thus the remaining quantum of 100 m
3
/hr will be utilized mainly
for plantation purpose.
Chapter-10

Solid Waste Management and Land Use

solid waste. However, nominal quantity of sludge from water and wastewater
treatment will be generated, which will be dried and utilized as manure within
plant complex.
Noise Environment

Acoustic enclosures will be provided wherever required to control the noise level
below 85 dB (A). Anywhere not possible technically to meet the required noise
levels, personal protection equipment will be provided to the workers. The wide
greenbelt around the plant will attenuate the noise level dissemination outside
the plant boundary.
Greenbelt Development

Greenbelt with a width of 50 m will be developed around the plant site. In the
proposed greenbelt, trees will be planted with a density of 1500-2000 trees/ha.
An annual budget of Rs. 0.2 Crores has been allocated for the green belt
development.
Socio- Economics

The major economic impacts, which will accrue to the region during the
construction phase and operation of the proposed plant, will be an increased
availability of direct and indirect employment. Local people will be benefited after
commissioning of the proposed project in terms of petty to major contractual jobs
and associated business establishments.

10.4 Environmental Monitoring Programme

Post project environmental monitoring is important in terms of evaluating the
performance of pollution control equipments installed in the project. The sampling
and analysis of the environmental attributes will be as per the guidelines of CPCB/
Gujarat PCB.

10.4.1 Cost Provision for Environmental Measures

It is proposed to invest about Rs. 201.8 Crores on pollution control, treatment
and monitoring systems for proposed plant. In addition to this, sufficient amount
will be spent on greenbelt development in and around the proposed power plant.

10.5 Conclusion

The proposed gas based power plant project has certain level of marginal impacts
on the local environment. However, development of this project has certain
beneficial impact/effects in terms of bridging the electrical power demand and
supply gap and providing employment opportunities that will be created during
the course of its setting up and as well as during the operational phase of the
project.
Proposed 7200 MW Gas Based Power Project at Khanpur-Deh
village, Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat
Chapter-11
Disclosure of Consultants Site

11.0 DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS

The profile of the Consultants is given below:

11.1 About Vimta Labs Limited

Vimta Labs Limited is a leading multi-disciplinary testing and research
laboratory in India. VIMTA provides contract research and testing services in the
areas of environmental assessment, analytical testing, clinical research, pre-
clinical (animal) studies, clinical reference lab services, advanced molecular
biology services and research & development studies.

The Environment Division has been in the forefront of its vision to provide
better environment through guiding and assisting the industry for sustainable
development. A stalwart in the mission to protect and preserve the natural
resources on earth for future generations, it offers extensive research and
consultancy services in the field of environment. With its rich experience, multi-
disciplinary expertise and with the support of its state-of the-art analytical
equipment, the services offered by the division are wide ranging and
encompasses entire gamut of environment management and monitoring services.
With its emphasis on quality services over the years, it has evolved itself into a
single reference point in India for comprehensive environmental services.

11.1.1 The Quality Policy

VIMTA is committed to good professional practices and quality of operations in
its testing, validation and research services;

VIMTA shall ensure customer satisfaction by maintaining independence,
impartiality and integrity in its operations;
VIMTA shall provide the services in accordance with national and international
norms;
VIMTA shall implement quality systems as per ISO/IEC 17025 and applicable
Good Laboratory Practices (GLPs) & Good Clinical Practices (GCPs), to
generate technically valid results/data; and
VIMTA shall ensure that all its personnel familiarize with the policies and
procedures of the quality system and implement the same in their work.

11.1.2 Major Milestones and Accreditations

1984 - Registered with an initial investment of Rs.200,000=00
1985 - Recognized by ISI (now known as Bureau of Indian Standards)
1987 - Qualified by the criteria of Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and was notified as one of the first 14 Standard Environmental Laboratories
published in the Gazette of India
1988 - Licensed for carrying out tests on Drugs and Pharmaceuticals
1991 - Accredited by NCTCF, DST, Government of India (the forerunner of
NABL)
Chapter-11

1995 - Accredited by NABL, India under its revised scheme, certified by
Standards Australia, Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC Guide 25 and
ISO 9002
1996 - GLP Compliance
1998 - Accreditation by GOSSTANDART and joint venture for certification of
Food Exports with ROSTEST, Russia
1998 - World Bank Recognition
2002 - ANVISA Brazil Certification
2003 - USFDA accepts Vimta Bioequivalence study report. Showcased Vimta
at AAPS (USA) and ICSE-CPHI (Germany)
2003 - Recognized by Saudi Arabian Standards Organization
2004- Enters Gulf market - Executes a contract for environmental
consultancy in Kuwait
2006 -Expands its overseas activities. Undertakes environmental assignment
in Saudi Arabia
2006 - Undertakes environmental impact assignment in Tanzania, Africa
2008 - Has been Pre-Qualified by World Health Organization (WHO)
2009 - Undertaken Environmental impact assignment in Cameroon, Africa
2010 - Accredited by QCI/NABET, Government of India for EIA report
preparation

11.1.3 Services Offered

Spread over 70,000 sq.ft lush green garden premises at Cherlapally, Hyderabad
(India), the scientifically designed and meticulously groomed infrastructural
facility of the Central Laboratory of VIMTA has the most sophisticated
instruments backed by an excellent team of professionals.

Over 150,000 sq. ft. of world class research laboratory is also under operation at
Biotech Park-Genome Valley, Hyderabad (India). Having all the facilities under
one roof is perhaps the only one of its kind in South Asia in the contract testing
and research sector.

VIMTA Central Laboratory, Cherlapally, Hyderabad VIMTA Life Sciences,
Genome Valley, Hyderabad.

Vimta offers services under the following specializations:

Chapter-11

Environment;
Analytical;
Clinical Reference Lab;
Clinical Research;
Preclinical;
Molecular Biology; and
Research and Development.

The environment division of VIMTA Labs Limited (VLL) has its presence all over
India and other countries including a strong association with international
consultants like Japan Bank for International Cooperation (JBIC), Kennametal Inc.
- USA, Rudal Blanchard - UK, E&E Solutions - Japan, NAPESCO & Kuwait National
Petroleum Corporation - Kuwait, Marafiq and Haif Consultants - Saudi Arabia and
others. Vimta Labs Limited has the following credentials:

Recognition by BIS, India;
Recognition by Ministry of Environment and Forests, Govt. of India and
various State Pollution Control Boards (wherever applicable) ;
Recognition by Department of Science & Technology, Govt. of India (NABL) ;
Recognition by Ministry of Defence, Govt. of India;
Recognition by APEDA, Ministry of Commerce, Govt. of India;
Recognition by Saudi Arabia Standard Organization (SASO), Saudi Arabia;
Recognition from NEMC, Tanzania;
Accreditation by NCTCF;
Certification from Standard Australia;
Recognition from ANVISA Brazil;
Recognition from USFDA;
Quality Assurance Services as per ISO/IEC 17025;
Quality Assurance Services as per ICH Guidelines;
Recognition by World Health Organization (WHO); and
Accreditation by NABET
Chapter-11


Chapter-11

11.1.4 Services of Environment Division

Environment essentially being a multi-disciplinary science, the range of services
offered by the division are also comprehensive and caters to the needs of
industry, pollution control agencies, regulatory authorities and in a larger pursuit
of a green globe. The services under environment include:

Site selection and liability studies;
Environmental impact assessments;
Environment management plans;
Carrying capacity based regional studies;
Environmental audits;
Solid and hazardous waste management;
Risk assessment (MCA,HAZON,HAZOP) & disaster management plans;
Occupational health and safety, industrial hygiene;
Environmental monitoring for air, meteorology, water, soil, noise, ecology and
socio-economics;
Industrial emission source monitoring;
Offshore sampling and analysis of marine water and sediments;
Marine ecological studies;
Marine impact assessment;
Rehabilitation and resettlement studies;
Forestry and ecological studies;
Geological and hydro-geological studies;
Land use /land cover studies based on remote sensing;
Socio-economic studies;
Due diligence studies;
Industrial epidemiological studies;
Wasteland management studies; and
Study on bio-indicators.

The services under Environmental Chemistry include:

Analysis of water, wastewater, soil, solid waste, hazardous waste as per
international codes;
Source emissions and work zone air/noise quality monitoring;
Analysis of SVOCs, VOCs, PAH, BTEX, AOX, PCBs, TCLP metals, TOC etc.;
Categorization of hazardous waste; and
Pesticide residue analysis.

11.1.5 Facilities of Environment Division

Vimta-Environment Division is located in scientifically designed Central Laboratory
with the state-of the-art modern facilities to offer vide range of services in indoor
and outdoor monitoring and analytical characterization in the field of
Environment. Further, it is ably supported by highly skilled and experienced team
of professionals in the fields of science, engineering, ecology, meteorology, social
planning, geology & hydro-geology and environmental planning.

Chapter-11

Besides the regular monitoring equipment such as Respirable Dust Samplers
(RDS), automatic weather monitoring stations, stack monitoring kits, personal
samplers, noise meters, portable water kits etc, the other major specialized
equipment include:

Monostatic Sodar-Designed by National Physical Laboratory, GOI;
Integrated Noise Level Meters-Quest, U.S.A;
Flue Gas Analyzers-Testo, Germany;
113-A Gravimetric Dust Sampler-Casella, London;
ICP AES- Varian, USA;
Gas Liquid Chromatographs with FID, ECD & pFPD-Varian, USA;
Gas Chromatograph with Mass Detector-Varian, USA;
Atomic Absorption Spectrometer [AAS]-Varian, USA;
PAS-AFC-123 instrument;
High Performance Liquid Chromatograph (HPLC);
Laser Particle Size Analyzer;
Bomb Calorimeter;
Polarographs;
X-ray Fluorescent Spectrometer;
Flame Photometer;
Carbon Sulphur Analyzer;
Computerized Fatigue Testing Machine;
Electronic Universal Testing Machine;
Fourier Transmission Infrared Spectroscope; and
Water Flow Current Meter - make Lawrence & Mayo.

HIGH RESOLUTION GAS CHROMATOGRAPHS

Chapter-11

11.1.6 Quality Systems

The basic fact that environment division and its supporting site laboratories are
accredited by NABL (IS0-17025) and Ministry of Environment and Forests, India
and by other international bodies stand testimony to its emphasis on Quality
Systems.

11.1.7 Achievements

Being the first laboratory to be recognized under Environment Protection (EP) Act
by Government of India (GOI), environment division with its best mind power and
industrial knowledge competency that allows it to compare with the best in the
business.

The environment division till date has executed about 600 environmental
impact assessment and environment management studies with risk
assessment and disaster management plans for various spectrum of industries
and obtained statutory approvals;

Supported by the strong modern laboratory and experienced hands,
environment division is well equipped in conducting due diligence, phase-I and
phase-II studies;

Undertaken specialized studies such as regional environmental impact
assessment on carrying capacity principle; upper air meteorological studies
using monostatic SODAR for major industrial complexes;

Associated with prestigious studies such as environmental pollution
monitoring around Taj Trapezium (India), pre and post satellite launch studies
for Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) and monitoring for offshore oil
& gas exploration for deep-sea water and sediment sampling;

The services offered include vide spectrum of industries covering power,
chemical, cement, mining, steel & alloys, metallurgical, aluminium refining &
smelting, dye & intermediates, bulk drugs, pesticides, agro-chemicals, petro-
chemicals, refineries, pulp & paper, oil & gas exploration & production,
asbestos, infrastructure such as highways, seaports and airports, river valley,
foundries etc;

Undertaken environmental consultancy for pipeline layout and up gradation of
API oil-water separators of various crude oil depots and petrol filling stations
of Kuwait National Petroleum Corporation, Kuwait;

Undertaken performance evaluation and capacity expansion of sewage
treatment plant and industrial wastewater treatment Plant for Marafiq, Saudi
Arabia;

Undertaken environmental impact assessment studies for pulp and paper mill
expansion of Mufindi Paper Mills, Tanzania, Africa; and

Chapter-11

Undertaken environmental impact assessment studies for bauxite mines in
Cameroon, Africa for Cameroon Aluminium Limited (CAL).

The details of the persons involved in the preparation of present EIA/EMP report
are presented below:

Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar Taluka, Bharuch District, Gujarat 8 8h ho or ru uc ch h
Chapter-11


Sr. No. Name Qualification Position Contribution Experience
1 Mr. M.Janardhan M.Tech (Env. Engg) Vice President
(Environment)
Co-ordination About 17 years of experience in the field of environmental
management and environmental engineering
2 Mr. E.Shyam Sundar M.Sc., M.Phil (Chem)
PGDES
Assoc. Vice
President (Env.
Projects)
Project Manager About 17 years of experience in the field of environmental
chemistry and monitoring
3 Dr.M.V.R.N.Acharyulu M.Sc., Ph.D (Ecology) Group Leader Expert About 16 years of experience in the field of Terrestrial,
Aquatic and Marine Ecology
4 Mr. K.V.Kishore Babu M.Tech (Env) Group Leader Expert About 8 years of experience in the field of environmental
management and environmental engineering
5 Dr. C. Mary Sukanya M.Sc (Tech), Ph.D (Envi
Science & Tech)
Expert Project Incharge About 7 years of experience in the field of Environmental
Management and Environmental Chemistry
6 P.Sivaramakrishna M.Sc (Envi Science) Scientist Field visit and
technical
contribution
About 3 years of experience in the field of Environmental
Impact Assessment
7 Mr. P. Niranjan Babu B.Com Asst Manager Secretarial
Support
About 18 years of experience in the field of environmental
monitoring
8 Mr. P. Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Sr. Draftsman Cartography About 10 years experience in the field of environmental
management and civil drawings
9 Mr. J. Rama Krishna I.T.I (Civil) Draftsman Cartography About 8 years experience in the field of environmental
10 Mr. B. Raju I.T.I (Civil) Draftsman Cartography About 2 years experience in the field of environmental

Iob|e o| Contents
Chopter-1
Introduct|on
Chopter-2
Froject Descr|pt|on
Chopter-3
8ose||ne Env|ronment $totus
Chopter-4
Ant|c|poted Env|ronmento| Impocts ond
M|t|got|on Meosures

Chopter-5
Ano|vs|s o| A|ternote Iechno|ogv ond $|te
Chopter-
Env|ronmento| Mon|tor|ng Frogromme

Chopter-7
Add|t|ono| $tud|es
Chopter-8
Froject 8ene||ts
Chopter-
Adm|n|strot|ve Aspects
Chopter-10
$ummorv ond Conc|us|on
Chopter-11
D|sc|osure o| Consu|tonts
Annexure-I
Copv o| IOk
Annexure-II
Govt. o| Gujorot Consent Letter

Annexure-III
Methodo|ogv Adopted |or
$omp||ng ond Ano|vs|s
Annexure-IV
Londuse Fottern
Annexure-V
Amb|ent A|r Quo||tv Leve|s
Annexure-VI
Demogroph|c Deto||s
Annexure-VII
Em|ss|on Co|cu|ot|ons

BPL Jambusar EIA Report

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BPL Jambusar EIA Report

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Frepored bv :

Location and Description of the Site

The proposed project site is located in Khanpur-Deh village, Jambusar taluka,

You might also like